PACIFIC MAGTRON INTERNATIONAL CORP
10-12G, 1999-01-20
Previous: CORPORATE INCOME FUND MON PYMT SER 502 DEFINED ASSET FDS, S-6, 1999-01-20
Next: K TRON INTERNATIONAL INC, SC 13G/A, 1999-01-21



    AS FILED WITH THE SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION ON JANUARY 20, 1999
                                                REGISTRATION NO. 333-__________
================================================================================
                       SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
                             Washington, D.C. 20549

                                 --------------

                                     FORM 10

                   GENERAL FORM FOR REGISTRATION OF SECURITIES

     Pursuant to Section 12(b) or (g) of The Securities Exchange Act of 1934

                                 ---------------


                       PACIFIC MAGTRON INTERNATIONAL CORP.
             ------------------------------------------------------
             (EXACT NAME OF REGISTRANT AS SPECIFIED IN ITS CHARTER)


            NEVADA                                        88-0353141
- -------------------------------             ------------------------------------
(State or other jurisdiction of             (IRS Employer Identification Number)
 incorporation or organization)


   1600 CALIFORNIA CIRCLE
    MILPITAS, CALIFORNIA                                     95035
- -------------------------------                            ----------
(Address of principal executive                            (zip code)
           offices)

                                 (408) 956-8888
              ----------------------------------------------------
              (Registrant's telephone number, including area code)

           Securities to be registered pursuant to 12(b) of the Act:

     Title of each class                      Name of each exchange on which
     to be so registered                      each class is to be registered
     -------------------                      ------------------------------

     -------------------                      ------------------------------
            n/a                                            n/a
     -------------------                      ------------------------------

       Securities to be registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act:

                          Common Stock; $.001 per share
                          -----------------------------
                                (Title of Class)

                                ----------------
                                (Title of Class)
<PAGE>
                                TABLE OF CONTENTS


ITEM 1.  BUSINESS..............................................................1

ITEM 2.  FINANCIAL INFORMATION................................................13

ITEM 3.  DESCRIPTION OF PROPERTY..............................................18

ITEM 4.  SECURITY OWNERSHIP OF CERTAIN BENEFICIAL
         OWNERS AND MANAGEMENT................................................18

ITEM 5.  DIRECTORS AND EXECUTIVE OFFICERS.....................................19

ITEM 6.  EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION...............................................19

ITEM 7.  CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED TRANSACTIONS.......................22

ITEM 8.  LEGAL PROCEEDINGS....................................................22

ITEM 9.  MARKET PRICE OF AND DIVIDENDS ON THE REGISTRANT'S
         COMMON EQUITY AND RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTERS........................22

ITEM 10. RECENT SALES OF UNREGISTERED SECURITIES..............................22

ITEM 11. DESCRIPTION OF SECURITIES...........................................23

ITEM 12. INDEMNIFICATION OF DIRECTORS AND OFFICERS............................23

ITEM 13. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTARY DATA..........................24

ITEM 14. CHANGES IN AND DISAGREEMENTS WITH ACCOUNTANTS
         ON ACCOUNTING AND FINANCIAL DISCLOSURE...............................24

ITEM 15. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND EXHIBITS....................................24
<PAGE>
                                ITEM 1. BUSINESS

GENERAL DEVELOPMENT OF THE COMPANY'S BUSINESS.

         Pacific Magtron International Corp., a Nevada corporation, is an
integrated solutions provider of computer related equipment and services. The
Company's primary business is the wholesale distribution of computer and related
hardware components and software for personal computers to value added
resellers, retailers, systems integrators, original equipment manufacturers,
independent hardware and software vendors, consultants, and contractors. In May
1998, the Company formed its FrontLine Network Consulting ("FrontLine")
division, a corporate information systems group, with the goal of serving the
networking and personal computer requirements of corporate customers. As used in
this document and unless otherwise indicated, the terms "Company," "we," and
"our" refer to Pacific Magtron International Corp. and its operating divisions
and subsidiaries.

         The Company was incorporated as Wildfire Capital Corporation
("Wildfire") in Nevada on January 8, 1996 with the stated purpose of engaging in
the business of providing a national retail market for premium wines on the
Internet. The Internet site was intended to provide advertising for wine
retailers and boutique wineries. Wildfire was initially capitalized with a
$5,000 investment by its founder, for which 500,000 shares of common stock were
issued. On August 27, 1996, Wildfire commenced a Rule 504 offering of 1,000,000
shares of its common stock at a price of $.05 per share. Gross proceeds from the
offering were $50,000 in cash.

         Due primarily to regulatory issues, the business of Wildfire did not
develop as expected, and as a result, Wildfire closed its marketing operations
in the fall of 1997. At that time, Wildfire began searching for new business
opportunities, and on July 16, 1998, the Board of Directors of Wildfire
recommended the acquisition of Pacific Magtron, Inc. ("PMI") to Wildfire's
shareholders. PMI, a California corporation incorporated on August 11, 1989, had
established itself in the computer products wholesale distribution industry as a
privately held company. The shareholders of Wildfire and PMI approved the
transaction, and Wildfire issued 9,000,000 shares of its common stock in
consideration for all of the outstanding shares of PMI. As a result, the former
shareholders of PMI became the controlling shareholders of Wildfire. No
securities were registered in connection with the transaction. Upon consummation
of the acquisition, Wildfire changed its name to Pacific Magtron International
Corp., and PMI continued its business operations as a wholly owned subsidiary of
the Company.

FINANCIAL INFORMATION ABOUT INDUSTRY SEGMENTS.

         We operate in only one business segment.

                                        1
<PAGE>
NARRATIVE DESCRIPTION OF OUR BUSINESS.

OVERVIEW OF THE INDUSTRY

WHOLESALE DISTRIBUTION

The microcomputer products distribution industry generally consists of
suppliers, wholesalers, resellers, and end-users. Wholesale distributors
typically sell only to resellers and purchase a wide range of products in bulk
directly from manufacturers. Different types of resellers are defined and
distinguished by the end-user market they serve, such as large corporate
accounts, small and medium-sized businesses or home users, and by the level of
value that they add to the basic products they sell.

- - INCREASED RELIANCE ON WHOLESALE DISTRIBUTION

We believe that the growth of the microcomputer products wholesale distribution
industry exceeds that of the microcomputer industry as a whole. In our view,
suppliers, vendors, and resellers are relying to a greater extent on wholesale
distributors for their distribution needs.

Suppliers are faced with the pressures of declining product prices and the
increasing costs of selling directly to a large and diverse group of resellers,
and they therefore are increasingly relying upon wholesale distribution channels
for a greater proportion of their sales. Many suppliers outsource a growing
portion of certain functions, such as distribution, service, technical support,
and final assembly, to the wholesale distribution channel in order to minimize
costs and focus on their core capabilities in manufacturing, product
development, and marketing. Likewise, vendors are finding it more cost efficient
to rely on wholesale distributors that can leverage distribution costs across
multiple vendors, each of whom outsources a portion of their distribution,
credit, marketing, and support services.

On the reseller side, growing product complexity, shorter product life cycles,
an increasing number of microcomputer products, the emergence of open systems
architectures, and the recognition of certain industry standards have led
resellers to depend upon wholesale distributors for more of their product,
marketing, and technical support needs. Due to the large number of vendors and
products, resellers often cannot or choose not to establish direct purchasing
relationships with suppliers. Instead, they rely on wholesale distributors that
can leverage purchasing costs across multiple resellers to satisfy a significant
portion of their product procurement and delivery, financing, marketing, and
technical support needs. Rather than stocking large inventories themselves and
maintaining credit lines to finance working capital needs, resellers are also
increasingly relying on wholesale distributors for product availability and
flexible financing alternatives.

                                        2
<PAGE>
- - OPEN SOURCING

Another apparent reason for the growth of the wholesale distribution industry is
the evolution of open sourcing during the past several years, a phenomenon
specific to the U.S. microcomputer products wholesale distribution market.
Historically, branded computer systems from large suppliers were sold in the
United States only through authorized master resellers. Under this single
sourcing model, resellers were required to purchase these products exclusively
from one master reseller. Competitive pressures led some of the major computer
suppliers to authorize second sourcing, in which resellers could purchase a
supplier's product from a source other than their primary master reseller,
subject to certain restrictive terms and conditions. More recently, all major
manufacturers have authorized open sourcing, under which resellers can purchase
the supplier's product from any source on equal terms and conditions. Open
sourcing has thus blurred the distinction between wholesale distributors and
master resellers, which are increasingly able to serve the same reseller base.
The Company believes that open sourcing enables those distributors of
microcomputer products which provide the highest value through superior service
and pricing in the best position to compete for reseller customers.

- - INTERNET SERVICES

One final industry trend, the emergence of the Internet, provides wholesale
distributors with an additional means to serve both suppliers and reseller
customers through the development and use of effective electronic commerce
tools. The increasing utilization of electronic ordering and information
delivery systems, including the ability to transact business over the World Wide
Web, has had, and is expected to continue to have, a significant impact on the
cost efficiency of the wholesale distribution industry. Distributors with the
financial and technical resources to develop, implement and operate state of the
art management information systems have been able to reduce both their customers
and their own transaction costs through more efficient purchasing and lower
selling costs. The growing presence and importance of such electronic commerce
capabilities also provide distributors with new business opportunities as new
categories of products, customers, and suppliers develop.

CORPORATE INFORMATION SYSTEMS CONSULTING

Because of factors similar to those encouraging the increased reliance by target
clients on wholesale distributors, corporations are increasingly looking to
specialist service organizations such as our FrontLine division to support the
development and maintenance of their information technology systems.
Accelerating technological advancement, migration of organizations toward multi-
vendor distributed networks, and increased globalization of corporate activity
have contributed to an increase in the sophistication and interdependency of
corporate computing systems. The desire by corporations to focus upon their core
activities while enjoying the benefits of such multi-vendor distributed
networks, together with increasing skill shortages within the information
technology industry, have led businesses to increasingly outsource the
development and maintenance of their computing systems to network consulting
professionals.

                                        3
<PAGE>
PRODUCTS AND SERVICES

         We currently operate in two business divisions. Our computer products
group operates under the name Pacific Magtron, Inc., our wholly owned
subsidiary, and our corporate information systems group operates as a corporate
division known as FrontLine Network Consulting ("FrontLine") within our PMI
subsidiary.

PACIFIC MAGTRON, INC.

PMI  distributes a wide range of computer  products,  including  components and
multimedia  and  systems  networking  products.  Through  PMI  we also  provide
vertical  solutions for systems  integrators and Internet resellers by combining
or "kitting" our products.

Our computer products group offers our customers a broad inventory of more than
1,800 products from approximately 30 manufacturers. This wide assortment of
vendors and products meets our customers' needs for a cost effective link to
multiple vendors' products through a single source. Among the products that we
distribute are systems and networking peripherals, and components such as high
capacity storage devices, CD-ROMs and CD recorders, sound cards, small computer
systems interface components, video phone solutions, floppy and hard disk
drives, and other miscellaneous items such as audio cabling devices and zip
drives for desktop and notebook computers.

FRONTLINE NETWORK CONSULTING

Our FrontLine division was formed in May 1998 to serve the growing needs of our
corporate customers with respect to their computer systems and networking needs.
We provide a wide range of services to our customers through this division
including advanced enterprise consulting, LAN/WAN design, hardware and software
troubleshooting and testing, and complete Internet business solutions. Our
corporate customers engage us to provide them with network and computing
solutions through the following types of services:

INTEGRATION SERVICES:

Our integration center provides a static free environment where customized
hardware testing and peripheral installations are performed. The expertise of
our integration team, along with the flexibility of the monorail system used in
the integration center, gives us the capability to create completely integrated
networking schemes on any available topology.

INTERNET/ENTHRONED SERVICES:

Our Internet business consultants help our customers solve business problems
with Internet based solutions. Among the services provided in this area are web
site content selection and design, development of Internet usage polices,
browser customization, software support, development of risk management
processes with respect to security concerns, Internet training, and return on
investment studies.

                                        4
<PAGE>
IT CONSULTING:

In order to assist our clients in making the most of their technology
investments, we help develop and implement strategic technology plans that allow
clients to maximize the use of their technology dollars. Among the areas
addressed in such plans are life cycle management, network analysis, and
business continuity planning in the event of an information flow interruption.

PROCUREMENT:

By taking advantage of the relationships established between manufacturers and
our wholesale distribution business, our FrontLine division is able to provide
specialty procurement services to our corporate customers. FrontLine
professionals manage the details of receiving, configuring, testing, and
shipping integrated systems for our customers, and assist them in dealing with
issues such as product availability forecasting, redeployment and disposal of
technology assets, warehousing, and packaging, tracking, and confirmation of
shipments. Our procurement services afford an additional benefit to our
customers by providing a single source for software and hardware orders, and by
making available volume discounts which might otherwise be unavailable to them.

TECHNICAL SERVICES:

Many of our customers technical service needs go beyond merely fixing hardware.
Our technicians provide a range of technical support from on-site service to
carry in depot service. Among the technical services we provide are: asset
management with inventory tracking and virus check services; on site desktop
support; warranty verification and tracking; and desktop deployment and
installation.

STRATEGIC PARTNERSHIPS

One of the factors that permits us to provide our FrontLine corporate customers
with a high level of service is the development of strategic partnerships with
leading manufacturers such as Intel, CISCO Systems, Cabletron, BayNetworks,
Microsoft, Wyse Technology, Compaq, Hewlitt-Packard, IBM, Novell, and 3Com.
Certification from these manufacturers is based on their recognition of our
expertise at implementing their client computing solutions, and allows us to
offer our customers the products that they are currently using, along with
continuous education regarding each product and the applications for which it is
used.

We believe that forming relationships with suppliers is important in providing
us with credibility in contacting large corporate clients. These relationships
also provide us with access to the resources and support of these suppliers in
FrontLine's initial sales and marketing efforts, and in the post-sale and
installation stages.

                                        5
<PAGE>
PLANS FOR EXPANSION

Our plans to expand our wholesale distribution business include:

     +    enhancing existing relationships and establishing additional strategic
          relationships with master distributors and manufacturers, both
          domestically and abroad;

     +    adding additional branded product lines and offering a wider range of
          products, such as networking and high end 3-D graphics products; and

     +    actively focusing on building our international sales through
          advertising in international markets.

Our strategy for developing our FrontLine division includes:

     +    applying monetary and human resources to increase the division's
          economic contribution over the next several years;

     +    continuing to seek certification from additional suppliers, and
          actively contacting potential corporate customers that need to
          implement, enhance, or replace their management information systems;
          and

     +    increasing our partnering relationships with independent technology
          consultants, which will expose us to a new customer base and provide
          us with additional consulting talent.

In addition to expanding our computer products and FrontLine groups, we also
intend to utilize our management's extensive network of industry contacts to
explore possible acquisition candidates and opportunities. There can be no
assurance that we will identify any acquisition opportunities, or if such
opportunities are presented, that they can be acquired on acceptable terms and
conditions.

VENDORS

DIRECT PURCHASING

Our strong financial and industry positions have enabled us to obtain contracts
with many leading manufacturers, including Creative Labs, Logitech, Toshiba,
Sony, TEAC, and Labtech. We purchase our products directly from such
manufacturers, generally on a non-exclusive basis. We believe that our
agreements with the manufacturers are in forms customarily used by each
manufacturer. The agreements typically contain provisions allowing termination
by either party without prior notice, and generally do not require us to sell a
specific quantity of products or restrict us from selling products manufactured
by competitors. As a result, we generally have the

                                        6
<PAGE>
flexibility to terminate or curtail sales of one product line in favor of
another product line if we consider it appropriate to do so because of
technological change, pricing considerations, product availability, customer
demand, or vendor distribution policies.

DISTRIBUTION

From our central warehouse facility in Milpitas, California, we distribute
microcomputer products throughout the United States and foreign countries,
including Canada, the United Kingdom, France, Russia and Israel. A minority of
our distribution agreements are limited by territory. In those cases, however,
North America is usually the territory granted to us. We will continue to seek
to expand the geographical scope of our distributor arrangements.

CUSTOMERS

WHOLESALE DISTRIBUTION CUSTOMERS

Approximately 80% of our wholesale distribution customer base consists of
customers that integrate systems or subsystems or upgrade kits. Approximately 5%
are wholesalers, and the rest are value added resellers ("VARs"). The VAR market
segment is attractive because VARs generally rely on distributors as their
principal source of computer products and financing as they typically do not
have the resources to establish a large number of direct purchasing
relationships or stock significant product inventories. Corporate resellers,
retailers and direct marketers may establish direct relationships with
manufacturers for their more popular products, but like VARs, rely on
distributors as the primary source for other product requirements and as an
alternative source for directly acquired products.

We target customers by addressing their specific needs relative to product
knowledge and technology, including the special needs of resellers doing
business over the Internet or the electronic commerce market. These customers
have Internet websites where orders, order acknowledgments, invoices, customized
pricing information and other industry standard and electronic commerce
transactions are consummated. We provide inventory and product support for such
customers, and also provide resellers with a high level of service through our
pre and post sale technical support, electronic commerce tools, customized
shipping documents, product configuration services, and financing programs.

FRONTLINE CUSTOMERS

Our corporate information system group targets a very wide range of customers,
including almost any entity that uses network system services. Since the
formation of the division, we have completed projects for clients in industries
ranging from manufacturing to financial services to government agencies.

SALES AND MARKETING

         Our sales are generated by a telemarketing sales force, which consisted
of approximately 30 persons as of November 1, 1998 in sales offices located in
Milpitas, California.

                                        7
<PAGE>
         Members of the sales staff are trained through intensive in-house sales
training programs, along with vendor-sponsored product seminars. This training
allows sales personnel to provide our customers with product information and use
their marketing expertise to answer our customers' questions about important new
product considerations, such as compatibility and capability, while offering
advice on which products meet specific performance and price criteria. Our
salespeople are able to analyze quickly our extensive inventory through a
sophisticated management information system and recommend the most appropriate
cost-effective systems and hardware for each customer--whether a full-line
retailer or an industry-specific reseller.

         The sales force is organized in teams generally consisting of a minimum
of three people. We believe that teams provide superior customer service because
customers can contact one of several people. Moreover, the long-term nature of
our customer relationships is better served by teams that increase the depth of
the relationship and improve the consistency of service. It has been our
experience that the team approach results in superior customer service and
better employee morale.

         We provide compensation incentives to our salespeople, thus encouraging
them to increase their product knowledge and to establish long-term
relationships with existing and new customers. Customers can telephone their
salespersons using a toll-free number. Salespeople initiate calls to introduce
our existing customers to new products and to solicit orders. In addition,
salespeople seek to develop new customer relationships by using targeted mailing
lists, vendor leads and telephone directories of various cities.

         The telemarketing salespersons are supported by a variety of marketing
programs. For example, we regularly sponsor shows for our resellers where we
demonstrate new product offerings and discusses industry developments. Also, our
in-house marketing staff prepares catalogs that list available products and
routinely produces marketing materials and advertisements.

         We pride ourselves on being service oriented and have a number of
on-going value-added services intended to benefit both our vendors and its
resellers. For example, we are committed to training our salespeople to be
technically knowledgeable about the products they sell. This core competency
supplements the sophisticated technical support and configuration services also
provided. Salespeople who are knowledgeable about the products they sell often
can assist in the configuration of microcomputer systems according to
specifications given by the resellers. We believe that our salespersons' ability
to listen to a reseller's needs and recommend a cost-efficient solution
strengthens the relationship between the salesperson and his or her reseller and
promotes customer loyalty to a vendor's products. In addition, we provide such
other value-added services as new product descriptions and technical education
programs for resellers.

         Our management continually evaluates our product mix and the needs of
our customers in order to minimize inventory obsolescence and carrying costs.
Our rapid delivery terms are available to all of our customers, and we seek to
pass through our cost effective shipping and handling expenses to our customers.

                                        8
<PAGE>
COMPETITION

WHOLESALE DISTRIBUTION

We operate in a market characterized by intense competition, both in the United
States and internationally. Competition within the wholesale distribution
industry is based on product availability, credit availability, price, speed and
accuracy of delivery, effectiveness of sales and marketing programs, ability to
tailor specific solutions to customer needs, quality and breadth of product
lines and services, and the availability of product and technical support
information. We believe that we are equipped to compete effectively with other
distributors in these areas. Principal regional competitors in the wholesale
distribution industry include Greenleaf Distribution, Asia Source and Cynnex
Information Technology, Inc., all of which are privately held companies. Among
our principal regional and multi-regional publicly held competitors are Ingram
Micro Inc., and Tech Data Corporation. We also compete with manufacturers that
sell directly to resellers and end-users.

FRONTLINE

Competition within the corporate information systems industry is based primarily
on flexibility in providing customized network solutions, resources and
contracts to provide products for integrated systems and consultant and employee
expertise needed to optimize network performance and stability. Our principal
competitors in the corporate information systems industry include MicroAge and
SARCOM. We believe that we are equipped to compete effectively with our
competitors in this industry; however, most of our competitors have far greater
resources of capital, marketing and personnel than we have.

ASSET MANAGEMENT

INVENTORY LEVELS

We maintain sufficient quantities of product inventories to achieve high order
fill rates, and believe that price protection and stock return privileges
provided by suppliers substantially mitigate the risks associated with slow
moving and obsolete inventory. We also operate a computerized inventory system
that allows us to look at and deal with slow moving inventory. If a supplier
reduces its prices on certain products, we generally receive a credit for such
products in our inventory. In addition, we have the right to return a certain
percentage of purchases, subject to certain limitations. Historically, price
protection, stock return privileges, and inventory management procedures have
helped to reduce the risk of a significant decline in the value of inventory.

We have established reserves for estimated losses due to obsolete inventory in
the normal course of business, and historically, we have not experienced losses
materially in excess of our established reserves. Inventory levels may vary from
period to period due in part to the addition of new suppliers or large purchases
of inventory due to favorable terms offered by suppliers.

                                        9
<PAGE>
CREDIT TERMS

We offer various credit terms including open account, flooring arrangements, and
credit card payment to qualifying customers. We closely monitor our customers'
creditworthiness, and in most markets, utilize various levels of credit
insurance to control credit risks and enable us to extend higher levels of
credit. We also established reserves for estimated credit losses in the normal
course of business.

RISK FACTORS

ABILITY TO RESPOND TO TECHNOLOGY CHANGES

The market for computer systems and products is characterized by constant
technological change, frequent new product introductions and evolving industry
standards. Our future success is dependent upon the continuation of a number of
trends in the computer industry, including the migration by end-users to multi-
vendor and multi-system computing environments, the overall increase in the
sophistication and interdependency of computing technology, and a focus by
managers on cost-efficient information technology management. We believe these
trends have resulted in a movement toward outsourcing and an increased demand
for product and support service providers that have the ability to provide a
broad range of multi-vendor product and support services. There can be no
assurance these trends will continue into the future. Any failure to anticipate
or respond adequately to technological developments and customer requirements
could have a material adverse effect on our business, operating results and
financial condition.

INVENTORY VALUE

As a distributor, we incur the risk that the value of our inventory will be
affected by industry wide forces. Rapid technology change is commonplace in the
industry and can quickly diminish the marketability of certain items, whose
functionality and demand decline with the appearance of new products. These
changes and price reductions by vendors may cause rapid obsolescence of
inventory and corresponding valuation reductions in that inventory. Accordingly,
we seek provisions in our vendor agreements common to industry practice which
provide price protections or credits for declines in inventory value, and the
right to return unsold inventory. No assurance can be given, however, that we
can negotiate such provisions in each of our contracts or that such industry
practice will continue.

WARRANTIES

Our suppliers generally warrant the products we distribute and allow us to
return defective products, including those that have been returned to us by our
customers. We do not independently warrant the products which we distribute,
except that we do warrant our services with regard to the products which we
configure for our customers, and products that we build to order from components
purchased from other sources. Historically, our warranty costs have been
insignificant.

                                       10
<PAGE>
COMPETITION

The computer services industry is intensely competitive and many of our
competitors have capital, marketing expertise and personnel resources far
superior to that of ours. There can be no assurance that we will be able to
compete successfully in the future or that competitive pressures will not result
in price reductions or other developments in our market which could have a
material adverse effect on our business.

RECRUITMENT AND RETENTION OF TECHNICAL PERSONNEL

We depend upon an ability to attract, hire and retain technical personnel who
possess the skills and experience necessary to meet our personnel needs and the
staffing requirements of our clients. Competition for individuals with proven
technical skills is intense, and the computer industry in general experiences a
high rate of attrition of such personnel. We compete for such individuals with
other systems integrators and providers of outsourcing services as well as
temporary personnel agencies, computer systems consultants, clients and
potential clients. Failure to attract and retain sufficient technical personnel
would have a material adverse effect on our business, operating results and
financial condition.

YEAR 2000 RISKS

The Year 2000 problem concerns the inability of certain computer systems to
appropriately recognize the year 2000 when the last two digits of the year are
entered in the date field. We have assessed our Year 2000 requirements and
believe that expenditures necessary to make our major computer systems and some
non-critical programs Year 2000 compliant will be immaterial. There can be no
assurance at this point, however, that the Year 2000 problem will not have a
material adverse effect upon our operating results and financial condition. For
more information on our assessment of the Year 2000 risk, please see "Year 2000"
in the section entitled "Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial
Condition and Results of Operation" in this Registration Statement.

DEPENDENCE ON CONTINUED MANUFACTURER CERTIFICATION

The future success of our FrontLine business depends in part on our continued
certification from leading manufacturers. Without such authorizations, we would
be unable to provide the range of services currently offered. There can be no
assurance that such manufacturers will continue to certify us as an approved
service provider, and the loss of one or more of such authorizations could have
a material adverse effect on our FrontLine business, operating results or
financial condition

DEPENDENCE ON SUPPLIERS

One supplier accounted for approximately 14%, 20% and 30% of our total purchases
for the nine month period ended September 30, 1998 and the years ended December
31, 1997 and 1996, respectively. During the nine month period ended September
30, 1998, two additional suppliers accounted for approximately 12% and 11% of
our total purchases. Although we have not experienced significant problems with
suppliers, there can be no assurance that such relationships will continue or,
in the event of a termination of our relationship with any given supplier, that
we would be able to obtain alternative sources of supply on comparable terms

                                       11
<PAGE>
without a material disruption in our ability to provide products and services to
our clients. This may cause a possible loss of sales that could adversely affect
our operating results.

PROJECT RISKS

The nature of our engagements exposes us to a variety of risks. Many of our
engagements involve projects that are critical to the operations of our clients'
businesses. Our failure or inability to meet a client's expectations in the
performance of our services or to do so in the time frame required by such
client could result in a claim for substantial damages, regardless of whether we
were responsible for such failure. We are in the business of employing people
and placing them in the workplace of other businesses. Therefore, we are also
exposed to liability with respect to actions taken by our employees while on
assignment, such as damages caused by employee errors and omissions, misuse of
client proprietary information, misappropriation of funds, discrimination and
harassment, theft of client property, other criminal activity or torts and other
claims. Although we maintain general liability insurance coverage in the
aggregate amount of $4,000,000, there can be no assurance that such coverage
will continue to be available on reasonable terms or in sufficient amounts to
cover one or more large claims, or that the insurer will not disclaim coverage
as to any future claim. The successful assertion of one or more large claims
against us that exceed available insurance coverage or changes in our insurance
policies, including premium increases or the imposition of large deductible or
co-insurance requirements, could have a material adverse effect on our business,
operating results and financial condition.

DEPENDENCE ON KEY PERSONNEL

Our continued success will depend to a significant extent upon our senior
management, including Theodore Li, our President. The loss of the services of
Mr. Li, or one or more other key employees could have a material adverse effect
on our business, financial condition or operating results.

EMPLOYEES

         At November 1, 1998, we had approximately 75 full time employees, all
of whom are non-union, and three executive officers.

FINANCIAL INFORMATION ABOUT FOREIGN AND DOMESTIC OPERATIONS AND EXPORT SALES.

         The Company has no foreign operations. While we distribute computer
products abroad, we do not segregate export sales from domestic sales.

                                       12
<PAGE>
                          ITEM 2.FINANCIAL INFORMATION

SELECTED FINANCIAL DATA.

         The following table contains certain selected financial data of the
Company and is qualified by the more detailed financial statements and the notes
thereto provided in this Registration Statement. The financial data as of and
for the years ended December 31, 1996 and 1997, have been derived from the
Company's financial statements, which statements were audited by Meredith,
Cardozo, Lanz and Chiu LLP. The financial data as of and for the nine- month
period ended September 30, 1998, has been derived from the Company's financial
statements, which were audited by BDO Seidman, LLP. The financial statements are
included elsewhere in this Registration Statement. The financial data as of and
for the years ended December 31, 1995 and 1994 have been derived from the
Company's unaudited financial statements.

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
 STATEMENT OF                  Nine Months Ended                         Fiscal Year Ended
OPERATIONS DATA                  September 30,                             December 31,
                          -------------------------   -----------------------------------------------------
                              1998          1997          1997          1996          1995          1994
                              ----          ----          ----          ----          ----          ----
                                        (unaudited)                               (unaudited)   (unaudited)
<S>                       <C>           <C>           <C>           <C>           <C>           <C>
Net Sales                 $77,922,000   $69,564,400   $96,388,500   $94,256,600   $58,714,600   $30,427,300

Net Income                  1,528,800       959,900     1,238,900     2,363,100     1,497,800       780,200

Net Income per share to          0.15          0.10          0.12          0.25          0.17          0.09
Common Shareholders-
Basic and Diluted


BALANCE SHEET DATA               September 30,                             December 31,
                          -------------------------   -----------------------------------------------------
                              1998          1997          1997          1996          1995          1994
                              ----          ----          ----          ----          ----          ----
                                        (unaudited)                               (unaudited)   (unaudited)

Current Assets            $14,615,400   $13,526,300   $10,681,800   $ 9,951,600   $ 8,692,500   $ 4,701,800

Current Liabilities         7,439,300     8,036,000     5,119,900     5,652,900     8,063,300     2,897,900

Total Assets               19,093,000    17,691,300    15,057,800    10,929,100     8,820,800     4,807,500

Long-Term Debt              3,396,000     3,622,300     3,428,400            --            --       803,000

Total Liabilities          10,845,700    11,658,300     8,579,300     5,842,600     6,216,400     3,700,900

Shareholders' Equity        8,247,300     6,033,000     6,478,500     5,086,500     2,604,400     1,106,600
</TABLE>

                                       13
<PAGE>
MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF
OPERATIONS. 

COMPANY OVERVIEW

         Pacific Magtron International Corp., a Nevada corporation (the
"Company" or "Pacific Magtron") is an integrated solutions provider of computer
related equipment and services. The Company's primary business is the wholesale
distribution of computer and related hardware components and software for
personal computers to value added resellers, retailers, systems integrators,
original equipment manufacturers, independent hardware and software vendors,
consultants, and contractors. In May 1998, the Company formed a corporate
information systems group called FrontLine Network Consulting ("FrontLine") with
the goal of serving the networking and personal computer requirements of
corporate customers. As used herein and unless otherwise indicated, the terms
"Company" "we" and "our" refer to Pacific Magtron International Corp. and each
of its operating divisions and subsidiaries.

OPERATING RESULTS

NINE MONTHS ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 1998 COMPARED TO NINE MONTHS ENDED SEPTEMBER 30,
1997

         Revenues for the nine months ended September 30, 1998 were $77,922,000,
an increase of $8,357,600 or approximately 12%, compared to $69,564,400 for the
nine months ended September 30, 1997. Revenues increased primarily due to
increased market share achieved through expanded marketing efforts.

         Gross profit for the nine months ended September 30, 1998 was
$5,224,700, an increase of $1,355,600 or 35%, compared to $3,869,100 for the
nine months ended September 30, 1997. Gross margin increased from 5.6% for the
nine months ended September 30, 1997 to 6.7% for the nine months ended September
30, 1998. This increase in gross margin arose primarily as a result of better
cost controls.

         Selling, general and administrative expenses for the nine months ended
September 30, 1998 were $2,611,000, an increase of $422,000 or 19%, compared to
$2,189,000 for the nine months ended September 30, 1997. As a percentage of
revenues, selling, general and administrative expenses increased to 3.35% in the
nine months ended September 30, 1998 as compared to 3.15% in the corresponding
period in 1997. Selling, general and administrative expenses increased primarily
as a result of expansion of the Company's business.

         Income from operations for the nine months ended September 30, 1998 was
$2,613,700, an increase of $933,600 or 56%, as compared to $1,680,100 for the
nine months ended September 30, 1997. As a percentage of revenues, income from
operations increased to 3.35% in the nine months ended September 30, 1998 as
compared to 2.42% for the nine months ended September 30, 1997. This increase
was primarily due to normal business growth and the addition of product lines.

         Interest expense for the nine months ended September 30, 1998 was
$210,300, an increase of $56,600, or 37%, compared to $153,700 for the nine
months ended September 30, 1997, arising from mortgage interest paid for the
Company's new office building. Interest income increased from $112,000 for the

                                       14
<PAGE>
nine months ended September 30, 1997 to $138,800 in the corresponding period in
1997, an increase of $26,800, arising from better cash management.

FISCAL YEAR ENDED  DECEMBER 31, 1997 COMPARED TO FISCAL YEAR ENDED  DECEMBER 31,
1996

         Revenue for fiscal 1997 was $96,388,500, an increase of $2,131,900 or
approximately 2.3%, compared to $94,256,600 for fiscal 1996. Revenues increased
chiefly as a result of expanded marketing efforts.

         Gross profit for fiscal 1997 was $6,023,800, a decrease of $371,500 or
5.8%, compared to $6,395,300 for fiscal 1996. This decrease in gross margin to
6.2% for fiscal 1997 from 6.8% for fiscal 1996 was primarily the result of
pressures on sales prices due to increased competition.

         Selling, general and administrative expenses for fiscal 1997 were
$3,859,600, an increase of $1,347,600, or 53.6% compared to $2,512,000 for
fiscal 1996. As a percentage of revenue, selling, general and administrative
expenses increased to 4% in fiscal 1997 from 2.7% in fiscal 1996, primarily as a
result of expansion of the Company's business.

         Income from operations for fiscal 1997 was $2,164,200, a decrease of
$1,719,100, compared to $3,883,300 for fiscal 1996. As a percentage of revenue,
income from operations decreased to 2.2% in fiscal 1997 as compared to 4.1% for
fiscal 1996. The decrease resulted primarily from a narrowing of profit margins
due to competition and an increase of selling, general and administrative
expenses resulting from the expansion of the Company's business.

         Interest expense for fiscal 1997 was $238,600, an increase of $200,700,
or 530%, compared to $37,900 for fiscal 1996. This increase resulted primarily
from mortgage interest paid for the new office building. Interest income
increased from $129,800 for fiscal 1996 to $158,800 for fiscal 1997.

LIQUIDITY AND CAPITAL RESOURCES

         Net cash used in operating activities during the nine months ended
September 30, 1998 was $1,268,500, which reflected the net effect of increases
in accounts receivable and inventories and was partially offset by the net
income for the period and increase in accounts payable. Net cash provided by
operating activities during fiscal 1997 was $314,300, a decrease of $2,073,400
compared to $2,387,700 in fiscal 1996. The net cash provided by operating
activities in fiscal 1997 reflects net income for the year and a decrease in
inventories that was mostly offset by the decrease in accounts payable and
income tax payable and increase in accounts receivable.

         Net cash used in investing activities was $76,600 for the nine months
ended September 30, 1998, primarily reflecting cash used for the acquisition of
property and equipment and advances made on a note receivable. Net cash provided
by investing activities in fiscal 1997 was $24,400, primarily resulting from a
decrease in other assets compared to a use of net cash for investing activities
in fiscal 1996 of $686,300, which was due mainly to a deposit made on the new
office building.

         Net cash used by financing activities was $29,800 for the nine months
ended September 30, 1998, primarily from payment of the mortgage loan for the
office building. Net cash provided by financing activities was $3,426,400 for
fiscal

                                       15
<PAGE>
1997, an increase of $3,401,800 from fiscal 1996. The increase is due primarily
to the loan received from a bank for the office building. The cash provided in
fiscal 1997 reflects primarily bank borrowing for the mortgage.

         The Company believes that the cash flow from operations and borrowing
availability under its credit facilities will satisfy the Company's anticipated
working capital requirements through at least the next 12 months.

RECENT ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS

         In February 1998, the FASB issued SFAS No. 132, "Employer's Disclosures
about Pensions and Other Postretirement Benefits," which standardizes the
disclosure requirements for pension and other postretirement benefits. The
adoption of SFAS No. 132 is not expected to impact the Company's Current
disclosures.

         In June 1998, the FASB issued SFAS 133, "Accounting for Derivative
Instruments and Hedging Activities." SFAS 133 requires companies to recognize
all derivatives contracts as either assets or liabilities in the balance sheet
and to measure them at fair value. If certain conditions are met, a derivative
may be specifically designated as a hedge, the objective of which is to match
the timing of gain or loss recognition on the hedging derivative with the
recognition of (i) the changes in the fair value of the hedged asset or
liability that are attributable to the hedged risk or (ii) the earnings effect
of the hedged forecasted transaction. For a derivative not designated as a
hedging instrument, the gain or loss is recognized in income in the period of
change. SFAS 133 is effective for all fiscal quarters of fiscal years beginning
after June 15, 1999.

         Historically, the Company has not entered into derivatives contracts
either to hedge existing risks or for speculative purposes. Accordingly, the
Company does not expect adoption of the new standard on January 1, 2000 to
affect its financial statements.

INFLATION

         Inflation has not had a material effect upon the Company's results of
operations to date. In the event the rate of inflation should accelerate in the
future, it is expected that costs in connection with the provision by the
Company of its services and products will increase, and, to the extent such
increased costs are not offset by increased revenues, the operations of the
Company may be adversely affected.

YEAR 2000

         The Year 2000 problem concerns the inability of certain computer
systems to appropriately recognize the Year 2000 when the last two digits of the
year are entered in the date field. The Company's date critical functions
related to the Year 2000 and beyond, such as sales, distribution, purchasing,
inventory control, merchandise, planning and replenishment, facilities, and
financial systems, may be adversely affected unless these computer systems are
or become Year 2000 complaint. The Company's management has assessed the Year
2000 requirements and believes that expenditures necessary to make the Company's
major computer systems and some non-critical programs Year 2000 compliant will
be immaterial. However, no assurance can be given at this point that the
Company's computer system will be Year 2000 compliant in a timely manner or that

                                       16
<PAGE>
the Company will not incur significant additional expenses pursuing Year 2000
compliance. Furthermore, the Company could be adversely affected by the Year
2000 problem if computer systems of third parties such as banks, suppliers and
others with whom the Company does business fail to address the Year 2000 problem
successfully. For example, the Company may be adversely affected by, among other
things, warranty and other claims made by the Company's suppliers related to
product failures caused by the Year 2000 problem, the disruption or inaccuracy
of data provided to the Company by non-Year 2000 compliant third parties, and
the failure of the Company's service providers to become Year 2000 compliant. In
an effort to evaluate and reduce its exposure in this area, the Company intends
to make an inquiry of its vendors and other partners about their progress in
identifying and addressing problems that their computer systems may face in
correctly processing date information related to the Year 2000. In particular,
the Company will seek to obtain statements from a substantial majority of its
suppliers that certain of their products are Year 20000 compliant, can be
upgraded to meet Year 2000 demands, or do not affect "date sensitive"
information. however, despite the Company's efforts to date, there can be no
assurance that the Year 2000 problem will not have a material adverse effect on
the Company in the future.

         The Company's management believes that the purchasing patterns of
customers and prospective customers might be affected by Year 2000 issues. Many
companies may need to modify or upgrade their information systems to address the
Year 2000 problem. The effects of this issue and of the efforts by other
companies to address it are unclear. Many companies are expending significant
resources to correct their current software systems for Year 2000 compliance.
These expenditures might result in reduced funds available to purchase services
and products such as those that the Company offers.

FORWARD LOOKING INFORMATION

         This Registration Statement contains certain forward-looking statements
and information. The cautionary statements made herein should be read as being
applicable to all related forward- looking statements wherever they appear.
Forward-looking statements, by their very nature, include risks and
uncertainties. Accordingly, our actual results could differ materially from
those discussed herein. A wide variety of factors could cause or contribute to
such differences and could adversely impact revenues, profitability, cash flows
and capital needs. Such factors, many of which are beyond our control, include
the following: our success in obtaining new contracts; the volume and type of
work orders that are received under such contracts; the accuracy of the cost
estimates for the projects; our ability to complete the project on time and
within budget; levels of, and ability to collect accounts receivable;
availability of trained personnel and utilization of our capacity to complete
work; competition and competitive pressures on pricing; and economic conditions
in the United States and in the regions served.

QUANTITATIVE AND QUALITATIVE DISCLOSURES ABOUT MARKET RISK

         The Company is not exposed to material risk based on interest rate
fluctuation, exchange rate fluctuation, or commodity price fluctuation.

                                       17
<PAGE>
                         ITEM 3. DESCRIPTION OF PROPERTY

         The Company owns property located at 1600 California Circle, Milpitas,
California 95035, subject to mortgages in the amount of $3,438,600 at September
30, 1998. This property is the location of our executive office and warehouse
and is suitable for the current size and nature of the Company's operations.


                ITEM 4. SECURITY OWNERSHIP OF CERTAIN BENEFICIAL
                              OWNERS AND MANAGEMENT

         The following table sets forth information, as of December 1, 1998,
with respect to the number of shares of Common Stock of the Company beneficially
owned by individual directors, by all directors and officers of the Company as a
group, and by persons known to own more than 5% of the Company's Common Stock.
The Company has no other class of voting stock outstanding.

NAME OF BENEFICIAL                                           PERCENT OF
OWNER AND ADDRESS                   NUMBER OF SHARES     COMMON STOCK OWNED
- -----------------                   ----------------     ------------------
Theodore S. Li                         4,500,000                45%
1600 California Circle
Milpitas, California 95035

Hui "Cynthia" Lee                      4,500,000                45%
1600 California Circle
Milpitas, California 95035

Betty Li (1)                              -0-                   -0-
1600 California Circle
Milpitas, California 95035

Jey Hsin Yao (2)                          -0-                   -0-
1600 California Circle
Milpitas, California 95035

All Directors and Officers as a        9,000,000                90%
Group (four persons)

- ----------
(1)  Betty Li is the wife of Theodore S. Li.
(2)  Jey Hsin Yao is the husband of Cynthia Lee.

                                       18
<PAGE>
                      ITEM 5. DIRECTORS AND EXECUTIVE OFFICERS

         The following sets forth certain information with respect to directors
and executive officers of the Company with the year in which each director's
term expires in parentheses.


     NAME             AGE          POSITION WITH THE COMPANY AND TENURE
     ----             ---          ------------------------------------

Theodore S. Li         41     Director, President and Treasurer since 1998.
                              (1999)

Hui "Cynthia" Lee      36     Director and Secretary since 1998. (1999)

Betty Li (1)           37     Director since 1998. (1999)

Jey Hsin Yao (2)       36     Director since 1998. (1999)

- ----------
(1)  Betty Li is the wife of Theodore S. Li.
(2)  Jey Hsin Yao is the husband of Cynthia Lee.

         THEODORE S. LI has served as the President, Treasurer and a Director of
the Company since 1998 and as the President and a Director of PMI since 1995. He
is responsible for the Company's operations, technical functions and finance.

         HUI "CYNTHIA" LEE has served as the Secretary and a Director of the
Company since 1998, and as a Director and Vice President, Sales and Purchasing
of PMI since 1994. She is responsible for the Company's sales and purchasing
functions.

         BETTY LI has served as a Director of the Company since 1998, and as a
Director of PMI since 1995. She has been an engineer with Motorola since 1988.

         JEY HSIN YAO has served as a Director of the Company since 1998, and as
the Secretary and a Director of PMI since 1995. He has been employed at Fujitsu
as a senior researcher since 1992.

                         ITEM 6. EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION

         The following table sets forth all cash compensation paid by the
Company to the chief executive officer and the most highly compensated executive
officers and key employees whose total remuneration exceeded $100,000 for
services rendered in all capacities to the Company during the last three
completed fiscal years.

                                       19
<PAGE>
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                               Annual Compensation           Long-Term Compensation
                           ---------------------------   -------------------------------
                                                                 Awards          Payouts
                                                 Other   ---------------------   -------     All
Name and                                        Annual   Restricted                         Other
Principal                                       Compen-    Stock      Options/    LTIP     Compen-
Positions         Year(1)   Salary     Bonus    sation    Award(s)      SARs     Payouts  sation (2)
- ---------------   -------  --------   --------  -------  ----------   --------   -------  ----------
<S>                 <C>    <C>        <C>         <C>        <C>        <C>        <C>     <C>
Theodore S. Li      1998   $120,000         --     --         --         --         --      $19,000
President,          1997    120,000   $250,000     --         --         --         --       19,000
Treasurer           1996    120,000         --     --         --         --         --       19,000
and Director

Hui "Cynthia"       1998     97,500         --     --         --         --         --       19,000
Lee, Secretary      1997     75,540    250,000     --         --         --         --       19,000
and Director        1996         --         --     --         --         --         --       19,000
</TABLE>
- ----------
(1)  The amounts set forth for the fiscal years 1997 and 1996 reflect
     compensation as executive officers of PMI. The amounts set forth for 1998
     represent compensation paid by PMI from January 1, 1998 to July 17, 1998,
     and compensation paid by the Company from July 18, 1998 through December
     31, 1998.
(2)  The amounts set forth in this column are the estimated automobile
     allowances received by the persons in the table.

STOCK OPTION PLAN

         The Company adopted the 1998 Stock Option Plan (the "1998 Plan") on
July 16, 1998. Under the 1998 Plan, 1,000,000 shares of the Company's Common
Stock are reserved for issuance. The 1998 Plan authorizes the Company to grant
to key employees and directors of the Company incentive stock options and
non-qualified stock options to purchase shares of Common Stock.

         The objectives of the 1998 Plan are to provide incentives to key
employees and to directors to achieve financial results aimed at increasing
shareholder value and attracting talented individuals to the Company. The Board
of Directors, or a Compensation Committee that may be formed by the Board and
comprised of non-employee directors, will administer the 1998 Plan and make the
initial determinations and recommendations to the Board as to the persons to
whom options will be granted and the amount, terms, conditions, and restrictions
of such awards. Although the 1998 Plan does not specify what portion of the
shares may be awarded in the form of incentive stock options or non-statutory
options, it is anticipated that a substantially greater number of incentive
stock options will be awarded under the 1998 Plan. Incentive stock options
awarded to employees of the Company are qualified stock options under the
Internal Revenue Code. Further, the 1998 Plan is a stock option plan meeting the
requirements of Rule 16b-3 ("Rule 16b-3") promulgated under the Securities and
Exchange Act of 1934, as amended ("Exchange Act"). Persons eligible to be
granted incentive stock options under the 1998 Plan will be those employees of
the Company whose performance, in the judgment of the Board or Compensation
Committee, can have significant effect on the success of the Company.

         The 1998 Plan will be administered by the Board of Directors or by a
Compensation Committee established by the Board. The Board or the Committee will
have authority to interpret the Plan's provisions, to establish and amend rules

                                       20
<PAGE>
for its administration and to make decisions or recommendations to the Board, in
the case of the Committee, as to the types and amounts of awards to be made
pursuant to the Plan, subject to the Plan's limitations.

         Incentive stock options may be granted under the Plan for terms of up
to ten years and at exercise prices at least equal to 100% of the fair market
value of the Common Stock as of the date of grant, except that incentive stock
options granted to any person who owns, immediately after such grant, stock
possessing more than 10% of the combined voting power of all classes of the
Company's stock or of any parent or subsidiary corporation must have an exercise
price at least equal to 110% of the fair market value of the Common Stock on the
date of grant. Non-Statutory stock options will have exercise prices as
determined by the Compensation Committee or the Board. The aggregate fair market
value, determined as of the time an incentive stock option is granted, of the
Common Stock with respect to which incentive stock options are exercisable by an
employee for the first time during any calendar year, shall not exceed $100,000.
There is no aggregate dollar limitation on the amount of non-statutory stock
options which may be exercisable for the first time by an optionee during any
calendar year. Payment of the exercise price for any option may be in cash, by
withheld shares which upon exercise of an option having a fair market value at
the time the option is exercised equal to the option price (plus applicable
withholding tax) or in the form of shares of the Company's Common Stock. Any
option granted under the Plan will expire at the time fixed by the Board or the
Committee, which will not be more than ten years after the date it is granted
or, in the case of any person who owns more than 10% of the combined voting
power of all classes of the Company's stock or of any subsidiary corporation,
not more than five years after the date of grant. The Board or the Compensation
Committee may also specify when all or part of an option becomes exercisable,
but in the absence of such specification, the option will ordinarily be
exercisable in whole or part at any time during its term. Subject to the
foregoing, the Board or the Compensation Committee may accelerate the
exercisability of any option in its discretion.

         Options granted under the Plan are not assignable. Incentive Stock
Options may be exercised only while the optionee is employed by the Company or
within twelve months after termination by reason of death, within twelve months
after the date of disability, or within three months after termination for any
other reason.

         As of the date of this Registration Statement, 169,674 options to
purchase shares have been granted by the Company under the Plan to employees,
none of whom are officers or directors. Of the options granted, 37,800 are
exercisable at $2.00 per share for a term of three years commencing March 1998,
53,550 are exercisable at $2.00 per share for a term of four years commencing
March 1998, 32,411 are exercisable at $4.00 per share for a term of three years
commencing November 1998, and 45,913 are exercisable at $4.00 per share for a
term of four years commencing November 1998.

DIRECTOR COMPENSATION

         Directors currently receive no cash compensation for their services in
that capacity. Reasonable out of pocket expenses may be reimbursed to directors
in connection with attendance at meetings.

                                       21
<PAGE>
             ITEM 7. CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED TRANSACTIONS

         The Company has two notes receivable outstanding, each in the original
principal amount of $90,000, payable by Theodore Li and Cynthia Lee. The notes
bear interest at an annual rate of six percent (6%) and had an original term of
three years, which has been extended to a term of four years. The principal and
interest balance on the two notes combined as of September 30, 1998 was
$235,000.

                            ITEM 8. LEGAL PROCEEDINGS

         None.

            ITEM 9. MARKET PRICE OF AND DIVIDENDS ON THE REGISTRANT'S
                     COMMON EQUITY AND RELATED STOCKHOLDER MATTERS

         Our Common Stock was not traded until July 10, 1998. From such date to
the present our Common Stock has been trading on the Nasdaq OTC Bulletin Board.

MARKET INFORMATION

YEAR ENDED 1998                                          LOW            HIGH
                                                         ---            ----
     Third Quarter (commencing July 10, 1998)           $3.00          $7.875
     Fourth Quarter                                      4.00           6.00

NUMBER OF SHAREHOLDERS

         The number of beneficial holders of the Common Stock of the Company as
of the close of business on December 1, 1998 was approximately 288.

DIVIDEND POLICY

         To date, the Company has declared no cash dividends on its Common
Stock, and does not expect to pay cash dividends in the next term. The Company
intends to retain future earnings, if any, to provide funds for operation of its
business.

                ITEM 10. RECENT SALES OF UNREGISTERED SECURITIES

         On July 16, 1998, the Company issued 9,000,000 restricted shares of its
Common Stock in exchange for 100% of the issued and outstanding capital stock of
PMI. Theodore S. Li and Hui "Cynthia" Lee were the sole shareholders of PMI,
and were each issued 4,500,000 shares of the Company's Common Stock in exchange
for their interest in PMI. The transaction was structured as a tax-free
reorganization.

                                       22
<PAGE>
                       ITEM 11. DESCRIPTION OF SECURITIES

COMMON STOCK

         The Company is authorized to issue 25,000,000 shares of Common Stock,
$.001 par value per share, of which 10,100,000 are outstanding as of the date of
this Registration Statement.

         Holders of the Common Stock are entitled to one vote for each share
owned for all matters to be voted on by the shareholders. Holders of the Common
Stock are entitled to receive dividends as may be declared from time to time by
the Board of Directors, and in the event of any liquidation, dissolution, or
winding up of the affairs of the Corporation, are entitled to receive a pro rata
share of any assets of the corporation legally available for distribution. There
are no redemption or sinking fund provisions applicable to the Common Stock. The
rights of the holders of the Common Stock are subject to any rights that may be
fixed for the holders of preferred stock, if and when any preferred stock is
issued. The Common Stock currently outstanding is validly issued, fully paid and
nonassessable.

PREFERRED STOCK

         The Company is authorized to issue 5,000,000 shares of preferred stock,
par value $.001 per share, of which no shares are currently outstanding. The
Preferred Stock may be issued from time to time as authorized by the Board of
Directors in one or more series for such consideration and with such relative
rights, privileges and preferences as the Board may determine. Accordingly, the
Board has the power to fix the dividend rate and to establish the provisions, if
any, relating to voting rights, redemption rate, sinking fund, liquidation,
preferences and conversion rights for any series of preferred stock issued in
the future. It is not possible to state the actual effect of the authorization
of additional preferred stock upon the rights of holders of the Common Stock
until the Board determines the specific rights of the holders of any additional
series of preferred stock. The Board's authority to issue preferred stock
provides a convenient vehicle in connection with possible acquisitions and other
corporate purposes.

               ITEM 12. INDEMNIFICATION OF DIRECTORS AND OFFICERS

         The Articles of Incorporation of the Company allow for the
indemnification of directors and officers to the fullest extent permitted by
Nevada law. Under a provision in the Articles of Incorporation, the Company will
indemnify and pay the expenses of any person who is or was made, or threatened
to be made, a party to an action or proceeding by reason of the fact that such
person is or was a director or officer of the Company or is or was serving at
the request or with the prior approval of the Company as a director or officer
of another corporation, against any liability asserted against such person and
incurred by such person in any capacity arising out of that person's status as
such.

         Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising out of the
Securities Act may be permitted to directors, officers and controlling persons
of the Company pursuant to the foregoing provision, or otherwise, the Company
has been advised that in the opinion of the Securities and Exchange Commission
such indemnification is against public policy as expressed in the Securities Act
and is, therefore, unenforceable. If a claim for indemnification against such
liabilities (other than the payment by the Company of expenses incurred or paid

                                       23
<PAGE>
by a director, officer or controlling person of the Company in the successful
defense of any action, suit or proceeding) is asserted by such director, officer
or controlling person in connection with any securities being registered, the
Company will, unless in the opinion of its counsel the matter has been settled
by controlling precedent, submit to a court of appropriate jurisdiction the
question whether such indemnification by it is against public policy as
expressed in the Securities Act and will be governed by the final adjudication
of such issue.

              ITEM 13. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND SUPPLEMENTARY DATA

Reference is made to the Consolidated  Financial  Statements,  together with the
notes thereto and the reports thereon of BDO Seidman, LLP and Meredith, Cardozo,
Lanz and Chiu LLP appearing on pages F-1 through F-17 of this Form 10.

             ITEM 14. CHANGES IN AND DISAGREEMENTS WITH ACCOUNTANTS
                         ON ACCOUNTING AND FINANCIAL DISCLOSURE

         None.

                   ITEM 15. FINANCIAL STATEMENTS AND EXHIBITS

     (a)  INDEX TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

          Report  of  Independent  Certified Public 
          Accountants, BDO Seidman, LLP                                   F-1

          Report    of    Independent    Certified    Public
          Accountants,  Meredith, Cardozo, Lanz and Chiu LLP              F-2

          Consolidated Financial Statements:

            Consolidated  balance sheets  September 30, 1998
            and December 31, 1997 and 1996                                F-3

            Consolidated  statements  of income for the nine
            month  periods  ended  September  30,  1998  and
            September  30,  1997  (unaudited)  and the years
            ended December 31, 1997 and 1996                              F-4

            Consolidated  statement of shareholders'  equity
            for the nine  month period  ended  September 30,
            1998 and the years ended  December  31, 1997 and
            1996                                                          F-5

            Consolidated  statements  of cash  flows for the
            nine month periods ended  September 30, 1998 and
            September  30,  1997  (unaudited)  and the years
            ended December 31, 1997 and 1996                              F-6

            Notes to consolidated financial statements              F-7 - F-17

                                       24
<PAGE>

     (b)  EXHIBITS

    EXHIBIT NUMBER                  DESCRIPTION
    --------------                  -----------
         2.1      Stock Purchase Agreement, dated July 17, 1998, by
                  and between Pacific Magtron, Inc., the Shareholders
                  of Pacific Magtron, Inc., and Wildfire Capital
                  Corporation

         3.1      Articles of Incorporation, as Amended and Restated

         3.2      Bylaws, as Amended and Restated

         10.1     1998 Stock Option Plan

         10.2     Sony Electronics Inc. Value Added Reseller
                  Agreement, dated May 1, 1996

         10.3     Logitech, Inc. Distribution and Installation
                  Agreement, dated March 26, 1997

         10.4     Wells Fargo Term Note, dated February 4, 1997

         10.5     Colson Services Corp. Servicing Agent Agreement

         10.6     Creative Labs, Inc. Mutual Confidentiality and Non-
                  Disclosure Agreement, dated September 10, 1997

         21.1     Subsidiaries

         27.1     Financial Data Schedule

                                       25

<PAGE>
                              SIGNATURES

         In accordance with Section 12 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934,
the registrant has duly caused this registration statement to be signed on its
behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.


                                        PACIFIC MAGTRON INTERNATIONAL CORP.,
                                        a Nevada corporation




Date: January 20, 1999                  By: /s/ Theodore S. Li
                                           ----------------------------------
                                                Theodore S. Li, President
                                                Chief Executive Officer

                                       26
<PAGE>
               REPORT OF INDEPENDENT CERTIFIED PUBLIC ACCOUNTANTS


To the Board of Directors and Shareholders
Pacific Magtron International Corp.

We have audited the accompanying  consolidated  balance sheet of Pacific Magtron
International  Corp. and subsidiary  (the Company) as of September 30, 1998, and
the related consolidated  statements of income,  shareholders'  equity, and cash
flows  for the nine  month  period  then  ended.  These  consolidated  financial
statements   are  the   responsibility   of  the   Company's   management.   Our
responsibility  is  to  express  an  opinion  on  these  consolidated  financial
statements based on our audit. The consolidated  financial statements of Pacific
Magtron  International Corp. and subsidiary as of December 31, 1997 and 1996 and
for each of the years then ended, were audited by Meredith,  Cardozo,  Lanz, and
Chiu LLP,  whose practice has been combined with our Firm and whose report dated
August 20, 1998 expressed an unqualified opinion on those statements.

We conducted our audit in accordance with generally accepted auditing standards.
Those standards  require that we plan and perform our audit to obtain reasonable
assurance  about  whether  the  consolidated  financial  statements  are free of
material  misstatement.  An audit includes examining,  on a test basis, evidence
supporting  the amounts and  disclosures in the financial  statements.  An audit
also includes assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates
made by  management,  as well as  evaluating  the  overall  financial  statement
presentation.  We believe  that our audit  provides a  reasonable  basis for our
opinion.

In our opinion,  the 1998 consolidated  financial  statements  referred to above
present fairly, in all material respects, the consolidated financial position of
Pacific Magtron International Corp. and subsidiary as of September 30, 1998, and
the results of their  operations  and their cash flows for the nine month period
then ended, in conformity with generally accepted accounting principles.


                                                          BDO Seidman, LLP

Milpitas, California
October 27, 1998



                                      F-1
<PAGE>

               REPORT OF INDEPENDENT CERTIFIED PUBLIC ACCOUNTANTS


To the Board of Directors and Shareholders
Pacific Magtron International Corp.

We have audited the accompanying  consolidated balance sheets of Pacific Magtron
International  Corp.  and  subsidiary  (the Company) as of December 31, 1997 and
1996, and the related consolidated  statements of income,  shareholders' equity,
and  cash  flows  for  the  years  ended  December  31,  1997  and  1996.  These
consolidated  financial  statements  are  the  responsibility  of the  Company's
management.  Our  responsibility is to express an opinion on these  consolidated
financial statements based on our audits.

We  conducted  our  audits  in  accordance  with  generally   accepted  auditing
standards. Those standards require that we plan and perform our audits to obtain
reasonable  assurance about whether the  consolidated  financial  statements are
free of material  misstatement.  An audit includes  examining,  on a test basis,
evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements.  An
audit also includes  assessing the accounting  principles  used and  significant
estimates  made by  management,  as well as  evaluating  the  overall  financial
statement  presentation.  We believe that our audits provide a reasonable  basis
for our opinion.

In our opinion, the consolidated  financial statements referred to above present
fairly, in all material respects, the consolidated financial position of Pacific
Magtron International Corp. and subsidiary as of December 31, 1997 and 1996, and
the  results  of their  operations  and their  cash  flows  for the years  ended
December 31, 1997 and 1996, in conformity  with  generally  accepted  accounting
principles.

                                            Meredith, Cardozo, Lanz 
                                                and Chiu LLP

Milpitas, California
August 20, 1998

                                       F-2
<PAGE>
                       PACIFIC MAGTRON INTERNATIONAL CORP.
                           CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEETS
                SEPTEMBER 30, 1998 AND DECEMBER 31, 1997 AND 1996
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                     ASSETS
                                                                            December 31,
                                                       September 30, -------------------------
                                                           1998          1997            1996
                                                           ----          ----            ----
<S>                                                    <C>           <C>           <C>        
Current assets:
  Cash and cash equivalents (Note 9)                   $ 1,888,000   $ 3,262,900   $ 2,995,800
  Accounts receivable, net of allowance
   for doubtful accounts of $113,100,
   $113,100 and $56,900, respectively (Note 9)           7,830,700     5,140,900     4,118,400
  Inventories                                            4,492,100     2,066,800     2,680,800
  Prepaid expenses and other current assets                259,200        83,500            --
  Deferred income taxes (Note 5)                           145,400       127,700       156,600
                                                       -----------   -----------   -----------
      Total current assets                              14,615,400    10,681,800     9,951,600

Property, plant and equipment, net (Notes 3 and 4)       4,040,400     4,114,800       145,400
Notes receivable (Note 2)                                  268,100       204,300       193,500
Deposits and other assets (Note 3)                         169,100        56,900       638,600
                                                       -----------   -----------   -----------
                                                       $19,093,000   $15,057,800   $10,929,100
                                                       ===========   ===========   ===========

                      LIABILITIES AND SHAREHOLDERS' EQUITY

Current liabilities:
  Accounts payable                                     $ 7,278,500   $ 4,986,500   $ 5,133,000
  Current portion of notes payable (Note 4)                 42,600        40,000            --
  Accrued expenses                                          91,200        93,400        54,400
  Income taxes payable (Note 5)                             27,000            --       465,500
                                                       -----------   -----------   -----------
      Total current liabilities                          7,439,300     5,119,900     5,652,900

Notes payable, less current portion (Note 4)             3,396,000     3,428,400            --
Notes payable to shareholders (Note 10)                         --            --       153,100
Deferred income taxes (Note 5)                              10,400        31,000        36,600
                                                       -----------   -----------   -----------
      Total liabilities                                 10,845,700     8,579,300     5,842,600
                                                       -----------   -----------   -----------
Commitments and contingencies (Notes 4, 6, 7, and 8)

Shareholders' equity (Note 10):
  Common stock, $.001 par value; 25,000,000
   shares authorized; 10,100,000, 10,000,000
   and 9,978,640 shares issued and outstanding,
   respectively                                             10,000        10,000        10,000
  Additional paid-in capital                             1,057,000       817,000       663,900
  Retained earnings                                      7,180,300     5,651,500     4,412,600
                                                       -----------   -----------   -----------
      Total shareholders' equity                         8,247,300     6,478,500     5,086,500
                                                       -----------   -----------   -----------
                                                       $19,093,000   $15,057,800   $10,929,100
                                                       ===========   ===========   ===========
</TABLE>
          See accompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

                                       F-3
<PAGE>
                       PACIFIC MAGTRON INTERNATIONAL CORP.
                        CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF INCOME
             FOR THE NINE MONTH PERIODS ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 1998 AND
                       SEPTEMBER 30, 1997 (UNAUDITED) AND
                   THE YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31, 1997 AND 1996
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                              September 30,            December 31,
                                September 30,     1997        --------------------------
                                   1998        (unaudited)        1997            1996
                                   ----        -----------        ----            ----
<S>                             <C>            <C>            <C>            <C>
Sales                           $77,922,000    $69,564,400    $96,388,500    $94,256,600

Cost of sales (Note 7)           72,697,300     65,695,300     90,364,700     87,861,300
                                -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------

      Gross margin                5,224,700      3,869,100      6,023,800      6,395,300

Selling, general and
 administrative expenses          2,611,000      2,189,000      3,859,600      2,512,000
                                -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------

      Income from operations      2,613,700      1,680,100      2,164,200      3,883,300
                                -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------
Other expense (income):
  Related party interest income      (8,100)        (8,100)       (10,800)       (13,500)
  Interest income                  (130,700)      (103,900)      (148,000)      (116,300)
  Interest expense                  210,300        153,700        238,600         37,900
  Other                                  --         (1,100)        (1,600)        (4,800)
                                -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------
Total other expense (income)         71,500         40,600         78,200        (96,700)
                                -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------

      Income before income taxes  2,542,200      1,639,500      2,086,000      3,980,000

Income taxes (Note 5)             1,013,400        679,600        847,100      1,616,900
                                -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------

      Net income                $ 1,528,800    $   959,900    $ 1,238,900    $ 2,363,100
                                ===========    ===========    ===========    ===========
Basic and diluted earnings
 per share                      $      0.15    $      0.10    $      0.12    $      0.25
                                ===========    ===========    ===========    ===========
Weighted average common
 shares outstanding              10,000,000      9,988,498      9,988,498      9,337,614
                                ===========    ===========    ===========    ===========
</TABLE>
          See accompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

                                       F-4
<PAGE>
                       PACIFIC MAGTRON INTERNATIONAL CORP.
                 CONSOLIDATED STATEMENT OF SHAREHOLDERS' EQUITY
             FOR THE NINE MONTH PERIOD ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 1998 AND
                   THE YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31, 1997 AND 1996

<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                        Common Stock      Additional                 Total
                                  ---------------------    Paid-in     Retained   Shareholders'
                                    Shares      Amount     Capital     Earnings      Equity
                                    ------      ------     -------     --------      ------
<S>                               <C>         <C>       <C>          <C>          <C>
Balances as of December 31, 1995   8,978,640   $ 9,000   $  621,300   $2,049,500   $2,679,800

Issuance of common stock for
  cash in January, 1996              333,333       300        4,700           --        5,000

Issuance of common stock for
  cash in public stock offering
  completed in December, 1996        666,667       700       37,900           --       38,600

Net income                                --        --           --    2,363,100    2,363,100
                                  ----------   -------   ----------   ----------   ----------

Balances as of December 31, 1996   9,978,640    10,000      663,900    4,412,600    5,086,500

Issuance of common stock in
  debt conversion (Note 10)           21,360        --      153,100           --      153,100

Net income                                --        --           --    1,238,900    1,238,900
                                  ----------   -------   ----------   ----------   ----------

Balances as of December 31, 1997  10,000,000    10,000      817,000    5,651,500    6,478,500

Issuance of common shares for
  consulting services                100,000        --      240,000           --      240,000

Net income                                --        --           --    1,528,800    1,528,800
                                  ----------   -------   ----------   ----------   ----------

Balances as of September 30, 1998 10,100,000   $10,000   $1,057,000   $7,180,300   $8,247,300
                                  ==========   =======   ==========   ==========   ==========
</TABLE>

          See accompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

                                       F-5
<PAGE>
                       PACIFIC MAGTRON INTERNATIONAL CORP.
                      CONSOLIDATED STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS
               FOR THE NINE MONTH PERIODS ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 1998
                     AND SEPTEMBER 30, 1997 (UNAUDITED) AND
                   THE YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31, 1997 AND 1996
                                    (Note 11)
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                            September 30,          December 31,
                                            September 30,      1997         ---------------------------
                                                1998        (unaudited)        1997            1996
                                                ----        -----------        ----            ----
<S>                                         <C>             <C>             <C>             <C>
Cash flows from operating activities:
  Net income                                $ 1,528,800     $   959,900     $ 1,238,900     $ 2,363,100
  Adjustments to reconcile net income to
   net cash (used in) provided by
   operating activities:
    Depreciation and amortization               103,100          93,600         128,000          37,300
    Allowance for doubtful accounts                  --              --          56,200          33,800
    Deferred income taxes                       (38,300)         74,700          23,300         (44,500)
    Changes in current assets and
     liabilities:
      Accounts receivable                    (2,689,800)     (1,361,400)     (1,078,800)        735,300
      Interest receivable                        (8,100)             --         (10,800)        (13,500)
      Inventories                            (2,425,300)       (718,300)        614,000        (325,500)
      Prepaid expenses and
         other current assets                   (55,700)       (152,200)        (83,500)         (6,800)
      Accounts payable                        2,292,000       2,766,100        (146,500)       (161,400)
      Accrued expenses                           (2,200)         43,200          39,000           9,900
      Income taxes payable                       27,000        (465,500)       (465,500)       (240,000)
                                            -----------     -----------     -----------     -----------
        Net cash (used in) provided
         by operating activities             (1,268,500)      1,240,100         314,300       2,387,700
                                            -----------     -----------     -----------     -----------
Cash flows from investing activities:
 Notes receivable                               (55,700)             --              --              --
 Deposits and other assets                        7,800         636,000         623,800        (621,700)
 Acquisition of property and equipment          (28,700)       (585,100)       (599,400)        (64,600)
                                            -----------     -----------     -----------     -----------
        Net cash (used in) provided by
         investing activities                   (76,600)         50,900          24,400        (686,300)
                                            -----------     -----------     -----------     -----------
Cash flows from financing activities:
  Proceeds from issuance of common stock             --              --              --          43,600
  Payment of loan fee                                --         (29,400)        (42,000)             --
  Principal payments on SBA loan                (17,400)        (12,400)        (18,100)             --
  Principal payments on bank loan               (12,400)         (7,700)        (11,500)             --
  Payment on equipment loan                          --              --              --         (19,000)
                                            -----------     -----------     -----------     -----------
        Net cash (used in) provided by
         financing activities                   (29,800)        (49,500)        (71,600)         24,600
                                            -----------     -----------     -----------     -----------
Net (decrease) increase
 in cash and cash equivalents                (1,374,900)      1,241,500         267,100       1,726,000

Cash and cash equivalents, beginning
 of period                                    3,262,900       2,995,800       2,995,800       1,269,800
                                            -----------     -----------     -----------     -----------

Cash and cash equivalents, end of
 period                                     $ 1,888,000     $ 4,237,300     $ 3,262,900     $ 2,995,800
                                            ===========     ===========     ===========     ===========
</TABLE>
          See accompanying Notes to Consolidated Financial Statements.

                                       F-6
<PAGE>
                       PACIFIC MAGTRON INTERNATIONAL CORP.
                   NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
             FOR THE NINE MONTH PERIOD ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 1998 AND
                   THE YEARS ENDED DECEMBER 31, 1997 AND 1996


(1) SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES

     (a)  THE COMPANY

          Pacific  Magtron   International  Corp.   (formerly  Wildfire  Capital
          Corporation,  a publicly traded shell  corporation)  (the Company),  a
          Nevada Corporation, was incorporated on January 8, 1996.

          On July 17, 1998 the Company  completed the acquisition of 100% of the
          outstanding  common stock of Pacific Magtron,  Inc. (PMI), in exchange
          for 9,000,000  shares of the  Company's  $.001 par value common stock.
          For  accounting  purposes,  the  acquisition  has been  treated as the
          acquisition  of the Company by PMI with PMI as the  acquiror  (reverse
          acquisition).  The historical  financial  statements prior to July 17,
          1998  are  those  of PMI.  Since  the  Company  prior  to the  reverse
          acquisition  was  a  public  shell  corporation  with  no  significant
          operations,  pro-forma information giving effect to the acquisition is
          not  presented.  All shares and per share data have been  restated  to
          reflect the stock issuance and related three for two stock split.

          PMI, a California  corporation,  was  incorporated on August 11, 1989.
          PMI's   principal   activity   consists  of  importing  and  wholesale
          distribution  of  electronics  products,   computer  components,   and
          computer  peripheral  equipment to various  companies  throughout  the
          United States.

     (b)  NEW ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS

          In  February  1998,   the  FASB  issued  SFAS  No.  132,   "Employer's
          Disclosures about Pensions and Other Postretirement  Benefits",  which
          standardizes  the  disclosure   requirements  for  pension  and  other
          postretirement  benefits. The adoption of SFAS No. 132 is not expected
          to impact the Company's current disclosures.

          In June 1998,  the FASB issued SFAS 133,  "Accounting  for  Derivative
          Instruments and Hedging  Activities."  SFAS 133 requires  companies to
          recognize all derivatives contracts as either assets or liabilities in
          the  balance  sheet and to  measure  them at fair  value.  If  certain
          conditions are met, a derivative may be  specifically  designated as a
          hedge,  the  objective of which is to match the timing of gain or loss
          recognition on the hedging  derivative with the recognition of (i) the
          changes in the fair value of the hedged  asset or  liability  that are
          attributable  to the hedged  risk or (ii) the  earnings  effect of the
          hedged  forecasted  transaction.  For a derivative not designated as a
          hedging  instrument,  the gain or loss is  recognized in income in the
          period of change.  SFAS 133 is  effective  for all fiscal  quarters of
          fiscal years beginning after June 15, 1999.

                                                                       Continued
                                       F-7
<PAGE>
                       PACIFIC MAGTRON INTERNATIONAL CORP.
                   NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS


(1) SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES - CONTINUED

     (b)  NEW ACCOUNTING PRONOUNCEMENTS - CONTINUED

          Historically,  the Company has not entered into derivatives  contracts
          either  to  hedge   existing  risks  or  for   speculative   purposes.
          Accordingly,  the Company does not expect adoption of the new standard
          on January 1, 2000 to affect its financial statements.

     (c)  USE OF ESTIMATES

          The  preparation of financial  statements in conformity with generally
          accepted  accounting  principles requires management to make estimates
          and  assumptions  that  affect  the  reported  amounts  of assets  and
          liabilities and disclosure of contingent assets and liabilities at the
          date of the financial  statements and the reported amounts of revenues
          and expenses during the reporting period.  Actual results could differ
          from those estimates.

     (d)  CONSOLIDATION

          The  accompanying   consolidated   financial  statements  include  the
          accounts of Pacific Magtron  International  Corp. and its wholly-owned
          subsidiary,  Pacific Magtron  Incorporated.  All intercompany accounts
          and transactions  have been eliminated in the  consolidated  financial
          statements.

     (e)  CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS

          The Company  considers all highly liquid  investments  having original
          maturities of 90 days or less to be cash equivalents.

     (f)  ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE AND ALLOWANCE FOR DOUBTFUL ACCOUNTS

          The  Company  grants  credit to its  customers  after  undertaking  an
          investigation of credit risk for all significant amounts. An allowance
          for doubtful  accounts is provided for  estimated  credit  losses at a
          level deemed  appropriate to adequately provide for known and inherent
          risks  related to such  amounts.  The allowance is based on reviews of
          loss,  adjustment  history,  current  economic  conditions  and  other
          factors that deserve recognition in estimating potential losses. While
          management  uses  the  best   information   available  in  making  its
          determination,  the ultimate recovery of recorded accounts  receivable
          is also dependent upon future  economic and other  conditions that may
          be beyond management's control.

                                                                       Continued
                                       F-8
<PAGE>
                       PACIFIC MAGTRON INTERNATIONAL CORP.
                   NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS


(1) SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES - CONTINUED

     (g)  INVENTORIES

          Inventories, consisting primarily of finished goods, are stated at the
          lower of cost (moving weighted average method) or market.

     (h)  PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

          Property,  plant and  equipment  are stated at cost.  Depreciation  is
          provided  using the  straight-line  method over the related  estimated
          useful lives, as follows:

                                                       Estimated useful lives
                                                       ----------------------
                  Building 39 years
                  Furniture and fixtures                      7 years
                  Computers and equipment                     5 years
                  Automobiles                                 5 years

     (i)  OTHER ASSETS

          Other assets include loan  origination  fees which are being amortized
          on a method which approximates the interest method.

     (j)  ADVERTISING

          The Company's policy is to charge all advertising  costs to expense as
          incurred.  Advertising costs were $9,200,  $18,200 and $57,400 for the
          nine  month  period  ended  September  30,  1998 and the  years  ended
          December 31, 1997 and 1996, respectively.

     (k)  REVENUE RECOGNITION

          The Company recognizes sales upon shipment.

     (l)  WARRANTY REPAIRS

          The Company is a distributor  of numerous  electronics  products,  for
          which the original  equipment  manufacturer  is responsible and liable
          for product repairs and service.

                                                                       Continued
                                       F-9
<PAGE>
                       PACIFIC MAGTRON INTERNATIONAL CORP.
                   NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS


(1) SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES - CONTINUED

     (m)  INCOME TAXES

          The Company  accounts for income taxes in accordance with Statement of
          Financial  Accounting  Standards (SFAS) No. 109, ACCOUNTING FOR INCOME
          TAXES, which requires an asset and liability  approach.  This approach
          results  in  the  recognition  of  deferred  tax  assets  (future  tax
          benefits) and liabilities for the expected future tax  consequences of
          temporary  differences  between the book carrying  amounts and the tax
          basis  of  assets  and  liabilities.   The  deferred  tax  assets  and
          liabilities  represent  the future tax  return  consequences  of those
          differences,  which will  either be  deductible  or  taxable  when the
          assets and liabilities  are recovered or settled.  Future tax benefits
          are subject to a valuation  allowance when  management  believes it is
          more  likely  than  not  that  the  deferred  tax  assets  will not be
          realized.

     (n)  LONG-LIVED ASSETS

          The Company periodically reviews its long-lived assets for impairment.
          When events or changes in  circumstances  indicate  that the  carrying
          amount of an asset may not be  recoverable,  the  Company  writes  the
          asset down to its net realizable value.

     (o)  FAIR VALUES OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

          The  following  methods  and  assumptions  were used by the Company in
          estimating its fair value disclosures for financial instruments:

          CASH  AND CASH  EQUIVALENTS:  The  carrying  amounts  reported  in the
          balance sheets,  accounts  receivable and accounts payable approximate
          fair value because of the short maturity of these instruments.

          LONG-TERM DEBT: The fair value of long-term debt is estimated based on
          current  interest rates available to the Company for debt  instruments
          with similar terms and remaining maturities.

          RELATED  PARTY NOTES  RECEIVABLE  AND  PAYABLE:  The fair value of the
          notes   receivable  and  notes  payable  to  shareholders   cannot  be
          determined.

          As of  September  30, 1998 and  December  31, 1997 and 1996,  the fair
          values  of  the  Company's  financial  instruments  approximate  their
          historical carrying amounts.

     (p)  EARNINGS PER SHARE

          Basic  earnings  per share are  computed  using the  weighted  average
          number of common stock shares outstanding.

     (q)  BASIS OF PRESENTATION

          The  accompanying  statements  of income  and cash  flows for the nine
          month period ended September 30, 1997 have not been audited.  However,
          in the opinion of management,  they include all adjustments  necessary
          for a fair  presentation  of the results of operations  for the period
          presented.

                                                                       Continued
                                      F-10
<PAGE>
                       PACIFIC MAGTRON INTERNATIONAL CORP.
                   NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

(2) RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS

          At September 30, 1998 and December 31, 1997 and 1996, notes receivable
          from two  shareholders  aggregated  $235,000,  $180,000,  and $180,000
          respectively.  These  notes  bear  interest  at 6% and are  unsecured.
          Principal and interest were due on October 9, 1998 and are expected to
          be extended. The accrued interest receivable pertaining to these notes
          was $33,100, $24,300 and $13,500 as of September 30, 1998 and December
          31, 1997 and 1996, respectively.

(3) PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

          A summary of property,  plant and  equipment at September 30, 1998 and
          December 31, 1997 and 1996 follows:
                                                              December 31,
                                           September 30, ---------------------
                                               1998         1997        1996
                                               ----         ----        ----
            Building (Note 4)               $2,826,600   $2,826,600   $     --
            Land                             1,158,600    1,158,600         --
            Furniture and fixtures             213,000      193,700     95,200
            Computers and equipment             64,100       54,700     41,000
            Automobiles                         91,000       91,000     91,000
                                            ----------   ----------   --------
                                             4,353,300    4,324,600    227,200

            Less accumulated depreciation      312,900      209,800     81,800
                                            ----------   ----------   --------
                                            $4,040,400   $4,114,800   $145,400
                                            ==========   ==========   ========

          At December 31, 1996,  deposits and other assets included a deposit of
          $615,000 on the land and building acquired in 1997.

(4) NOTES PAYABLE

          In 1997, the Company obtained financing of $3,498,000 for the purchase
          of its office facility. Of the amount financed,  $2,500,000 was in the
          form of a 10-year bank loan utilizing a 30-year  amortization  period.
          This loan bears  interest  at the bank's  90-day  LIBOR rate (5.69% at
          September  30,  1998) plus 2.5%,  and is secured by a deed of trust on
          the  property.  The balance of the  financing  was obtained  through a
          $998,000 Small Business  Administration (SBA) loan. The SBA loan bears
          interest  at 7.569% and is secured by the  underlying  property.  Both
          loans  are  collateralized  by  personal  guarantees  of  one  of  the
          Company's officers and principal shareholder.

          Under the bank loan, the Company is required to maintain  minimum debt
          service  coverage  and a maximum  debt to  tangible  net worth.  As of
          September  30,  1998,  the  Company  was in  compliance  with all debt
          covenants.

                                                                       Continued
                                      F-11
<PAGE>
                       PACIFIC MAGTRON INTERNATIONAL CORP.
                   NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS


(4) NOTES PAYABLE - CONTINUED

          The  balances of the notes as of  September  30, 1998 and December 31,
          1997 are as follows:
                                              September 30,     December 31,
                                                  1998             1997
                                                  ----             ----
               Bank loan                       $2,476,100       $2,488,400
               SBA loan                           962,500          980,000
                                               ----------       ----------
                                                3,438,600        3,468,400
               Less current portion                42,600           40,000
                                               ----------       ----------
                                               $3,396,000       $3,428,400
                                               ==========       ==========

          The  aggregate  amount of future  maturities  for notes payable are as
          follows:

               Years ending
               December 31,                                  Amount
               ------------                               ----------
                  1998  (3 months)                        $   22,400
                  1999                                        43,500
                  2000                                        47,300
                  2001                                        51,400
                  2002                                        55,900
               Thereafter                                  3,218,100
                                                           ---------
                                                          $3,438,600
                                                           =========
(5) INCOME TAXES

          For the nine month period ended September 30, 1998 and the years ended
          December 31, 1997 and 1996, income tax expense comprises:

            September 30,
                1998               Current       Deferred         Total
            -------------        -----------    -----------    -----------
            Federal              $   824,700    $   (33,800)   $   790,900
            State                    227,000         (4,500)       222,500
                                 -----------    -----------    -----------
                                 $ 1,051,700    $   (38,300)   $ 1,013,400
                                 ===========    ===========    ===========
            December 31,
               1997                Current       Deferred         Total
            ------------         -----------    -----------    -----------
            Federal              $   627,900    $    30,800    $   658,700
            State                    195,900         (7,500)       188,400
                                 -----------    -----------    -----------
                                 $   823,800    $    23,300    $   847,100
                                 ===========    ===========    ===========
            December 31,
                1996               Current       Deferred         Total
            ------------         -----------    -----------    -----------
            Federal              $ 1,285,700    $   (43,700)   $ 1,242,000
            State                    375,700           (800)       374,900
                                 -----------    -----------    -----------
                                 $ 1,661,400    $   (44,500)   $ 1,616,900
                                 ===========    ===========    ===========

                                                                       Continued
                                      F-12
<PAGE>
                       PACIFIC MAGTRON INTERNATIONAL CORP.
                   NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS


(5) INCOME TAXES - CONTINUED

          The following summarizes the difference between the income tax expense
          and the amount computed by applying the Federal income tax rate of 34%
          in 1998, 1997 and 1996 to income before income taxes:

                                                           December 31,
                                        September 30, ---------------------
                                            1998        1997        1996
                                            ----        ----        ----
           Federal income tax at
             statutory rate              $  868,600   $709,200   $1,353,200
           State income taxes, net of
             Federal benefit                144,800    137,900      263,700
                                         ----------   --------   ----------
                                         $1,013,400   $847,100   $1,616,900
                                         ==========   ========   ==========

          Deferred  tax assets and  liabilities  as of  September  30,  1998 and
          December 31, 1997 and 1996 were comprised of the following:

                                                                December 31,
                                             September 30, --------------------
                                                 1998        1997        1996
                                                 ----        ----        ----
           Deferred tax assets:
           State income taxes                  $ 77,200    $ 66,600    $127,800
           Reserves not currently deductible     55,900      50,700      28,800
           Accrued compensation and benefit      12,300      10,400        --
                                               --------   ---------   ---------
                                                145,400     127,700     156,600
                                               --------   ---------   ---------
            Deferred tax liabilities:
            Deferred interest income              10,400      10,500      5,800
            Tax depreciation in excess of book      --        20,500     30,800
                                               ---------   ---------   --------
                                                  10,400      31,000     36,600
                                               ---------   ---------   --------
                Net deferred tax asset         $ 135,000   $  96,700   $120,000
                                               =========   =========   ========

(6) LEASE COMMITMENTS

          During 1998, 1997 and 1996, the Company leased two  automobiles  under
          operating leases due to terminate in March 1999.

          Future  minimum  obligations  under  these  lease  agreements  are  as
          follows:

                Years ending
                December 31,                  Amount
                ------------                  ------
                    1998                     $ 7,500
                    1999                       7,500
                                              ------
                                             $15,000

                                                                       Continued
                                      F-13
<PAGE>
                       PACIFIC MAGTRON INTERNATIONAL CORP.
                   NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS


(6) LEASE COMMITMENTS - CONTINUED

          During 1996, the Company leased its facilities  under a non-cancelable
          operating  lease  which  terminated  in  December  1996.  The  Company
          extended the lease on a month-to-month basis through February 1997. In
          addition to the stated lease  payments,  the lease terms  required the
          Company to pay common area maintenance, property taxes, insurance, and
          certain other costs.

          Total rent expense for nine month period ended  September 30, 1998 and
          the years ended  December 31, 1997 and 1996 was  $22,200,  $47,900 and
          $113,900, respectively.

(7) MAJOR VENDORS

          One vendor accounted for  approximately  14%, 20% and 30% of the total
          purchases  for the nine month period ended  September 30, 1998 and the
          years ended December 31, 1997 and 1996, respectively.  During the nine
          month  period  ended  September  30,  1998,  two  additional   vendors
          accounted for approximately  12% and 11% of total purchases.  No other
          vendors  accounted  for more  than  10% of  purchases  for any  period
          presented.  Management  believes  other vendors  could supply  similar
          products on  comparable  terms.  A change in suppliers  however  could
          cause a delay in  availability  of  products  and a  possible  loss of
          sales, which could affect operating results adversely.

(8) EMPLOYEE BENEFIT PROGRAM - 401 (k) PLAN

          The Company has a 401 (k) plan (the Plan) for its employees.  The Plan
          is available to all  employees  who have reached the age of twenty-one
          and who have completed three months of service with the Company. Under
          the Plan,  eligible  employees  defer a portion of their  salaries  as
          their  contributions  to the Plan. The Company may make  contributions
          equal to 25% of each  participant's  contribution  up to the lesser of
          $9,500 or 6% of employee's  salary.  Contributions to the Plan totaled
          $9,500, $14,300 and $12,900, for the nine month period ended September
          30, 1998 and the years ended December 31, 1997 and 1996, respectively.

(9) CONCENTRATION OF CREDIT RISK

          Financial   instruments  which  potentially  subject  the  Company  to
          concentration  of credit  risk  consist  principally  of cash and cash
          equivalents  and trade  receivables.  The Company  places its cash and
          investments with high quality financial institutions. At September 30,
          1998 and December  31, 1997 and 1996,  the Company had deposits at one
          financial  institution,  which aggregated  $1,724,700,  $2,828,300 and
          $2,948,500 respectively. Such funds are insured by the Federal Deposit
          Insurance Company up to $100,000.

                                                                       Continued
                                      F-14
<PAGE>
                       PACIFIC MAGTRON INTERNATIONAL CORP.
                   NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS


(9) CONCENTRATION OF CREDIT RISK - CONTINUED

          A  significant   portion  of  the  Company's   revenues  and  accounts
          receivable   are  derived  from  sales  made  primarily  to  unrelated
          companies in the  computer  industry  and related  fields  principally
          throughout  the  United  States,  as well as some  foreign  countries,
          including Canada, the United Kingdom,  France,  Russia and Israel. For
          the nine month  period  ended  September  30, 1998 and the years ended
          December 31, 1997 and 1996, no individual customer comprised more than
          10% of sales.  The Company  believes  any risk of  accounting  loss is
          significantly   reduced  due  to  the  diversity  in  end   customers,
          geographic  sales  areas and the  Company  extending  credit  based on
          established  limits or terms. The Company performs credit  evaluations
          of  its  customers'   financial  condition  whenever  necessary,   and
          generally does not require cash collateral.

(10) CAPITAL STOCK

     (a)  DEBT CONVERSION

          In 1997, the two  shareholders/officers of the Company converted their
          loans in the amount of  $153,100  into 21,360  shares of PMI's  common
          stock, based on the fair value of PMI, at the time of conversion.

     (b)  CONSULTING AGREEMENT

          On July 17, 1998 the Company issued 100,000  restricted  shares of its
          common  stock  to an  unrelated  party  under  terms  of a  consulting
          agreement.   The   agreement   requires  the   consultant  to  provide
          introductions to a predetermined number of investment banking contacts
          and provide  certain  financial  advice to the Company over a two year
          period.  If the services are provided the shares will vest 50% on July
          17, 1999 and 50% on July 17, 2000. If the services are not provided as
          required the consultant  will forfeit those shares not vested.  If the
          Company makes an underwritten  offering prior to either of the vesting
          dates and the consultant has provided services in connection with such
          offering all of the shares not  previously  forfeited will vest on the
          close of the offering.

                                                                       Continued
                                      F-15
<PAGE>
                       PACIFIC MAGTRON INTERNATIONAL CORP.
                   NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS


(10) CAPITAL STOCK-CONTINUED

     (c)  STOCK OPTION PLAN

          On July 16,  1998 the Company  adopted the 1998 Stock  Option Plan and
          reserved 1,000,000 shares of Common Stock for issuance under the Plan.

          Activity under the Plan is as follows:

                                      Shares                       Weighted
                                     Available      Options        Average
                                     For Grant    Outstanding   Exercise Price
                                     ---------    -----------   --------------
       July 16, 1998                 1,000,000           --       $   --

       Conversion of PMI
           options to Plan options     (91,350)        91,350         2.00
                                     ---------    -----------     --------
       Balances,
           September 30, 1998          908,650         91,350     $   2.00
                                     =========    ===========     ========
       Options exercisable
           At September 30, 1998                      None
                                                  ===========

          Under the terms of the Plan,  options are exercisable as determined by
          the Board of Directors on the date of grant and expire five years from
          the date of grant.

          FASB  Statement  123,   "Accounting  for  Stock-Based   Compensation",
          requires the Company to provide pro forma  information  regarding  net
          (loss) income and (loss)  earnings per share as if  compensation  cost
          for the Company's stock option plans had been determined in accordance
          with the fair value based method prescribed in FASB Statement 123. The
          Company estimates the fair value of stock options at the grant date by
          using  the  Black-Scholes  option  pricing-model  with  the  following
          weighted average  assumptions used for grants in 1998:  dividend yield
          of 0; expected  volatility of 54 percent;  risk-free interest rates of
          5.7 percent; and expected lives of 4 years for all plan options.

                                                                       Continued
                                      F-16
<PAGE>
                       PACIFIC MAGTRON INTERNATIONAL CORP.
                   NOTES TO CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS


(10) CAPITAL STOCK-CONTINUED

     (c)  STOCK OPTION PLAN-CONTINUED

          Under the  accounting  provisions of FASB Statement 123, the Company's
          net  (loss)  income  and  (loss)  earnings  per share  would have been
          reduced to the pro forma amounts indicated below:

                                                 1998
                                                 ----
            Net Income:
                  As reported                 $1,528,800
                                              ==========
                  Pro forma                   $1,477,400
                                              ==========
            Basic earnings per share:
                  As reported                 $     0.15
                                              ==========
                  Pro forma                   $     0.15
                                              ==========
(11) STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS

          Cash was paid during the nine month  period ended  September  30, 1998
          and the years ended December 31, 1997 and 1996 for:

                                                   December 31,
                                September 30, ----------------------
                                    1998        1997         1996
                                    ----        ----         ----

                   Income taxes   $992,500   $1,345,400   $1,823,500
                                  ========   ==========   ==========

                   Interest       $210,300   $  238,600   $   37,900
                                  ========   ==========   ==========

          As  discussed  in  Note  10,  non-cash  financing  activities  in 1997
          resulted  from the  conversion of  shareholder  notes in the amount of
          $153,100 and in 1998 from the issuance of common stock for  consulting
          services.

          As discussed in Note 4, non-cash investing and financing activities in
          1997 resulted from obtaining  financing of $3,498,000 for the purchase
          of the Company's  office  facility and applying a deposit made in 1996
          to the purchase price.

                                      F-17

                            STOCK PURCHASE AGREEMENT

             THIS STOCK  PURCHASE  AGREEMENT  is made and entered into this 25th
day of June,  1998, by and among  WILDFIRE  CAPITAL  CORPORATION,  a corporation
incorporated  under the laws of the State of Nevada (the  "Purchaser"),  PACIFIC
MAGTRON,  INC.,  a  corporation  incorporated  under  the  laws of the  State of
California ("Company") and THEODORE S. LI, a married man, and HUI LEE, a married
woman, collectively, (the "Selling Shareholders").

                              W I T N E S S E T H :

             WHEREAS,   the  Purchaser  desires  to  acquire  from  the  Selling
Shareholders  all of the issued and outstanding  capital stock of the Company on
the terms and conditions hereinafter set forth; and

             WHEREAS, the Company and the Selling Shareholders deem it advisable
and for their  benefit to sell their  shares of capital  stock of the Company to
the Purchaser,  believing that it will  contribute  materially to the growth and
profitability of the Company.

             NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the premises and the agreements
and covenants  contained  herein,  the parties  hereto,  intending to be legally
bound hereby, agree as follows:

                                    ARTICLE 1

                                   DEFINITIONS

             For all purposes of this Agreement:

             1.1 "PURCHASER  SHARES" means the shares of common stock, par value
$.001 per share, of the Purchaser.

             1.2 "FISCAL YEAR" means the period from January 1 through  December
31 for each year referenced.

                         The parties  contemplate that (i) after the Closing the
Purchaser  will own one  hundred  percent  (100%) of the  Company,  and (ii) the
Company, as a new member of the Purchaser's

                                       -1-
<PAGE>
consolidated  group, will have its financial results included in the Purchaser's
financial results and have its federal income tax returns  consolidated with the
federal income tax returns of the Purchaser covering the appropriate  periods as
a result of its joining the Purchaser's  consolidated  group.  The parties agree
that  accountants  of the Company may be requested to perform such review as may
be necessary to have  financial  results  sufficient  to prepare a  consolidated
federal income tax return for the Company for any years required by the Internal
Revenue  Code.  The  Purchaser  shall  have the  right to have  such tax  return
reviewed by a representative  of an accounting firm designated by the Purchaser.
However,  the Company shall retain all responsibility and authority with respect
to such tax return.

                         At the appropriate times, the Purchaser may require the
auditors of the Company to prepare (i)  reviewed  financial  statements  for the
Company  for the 1996 and  1997  Fiscal  Years  and for the  nine  months  ended
September 30, 1998 and (ii) such financial  statements  regarding the Company as
the Purchaser  reasonably requests for use in preparing its consolidated federal
income tax returns.

             1.3  "COMPANY   FINANCIAL   STATEMENTS"  means  the  (i)  unaudited
financial statements of the Company for its fiscal years ended December 31, 1996
and  1997,  (ii) the  unaudited  financial  statements  of the  Company  for the
three-month  period  ended  March  31,  1998 and  (iii)  the  audited  financial
statements  of the  Company  which will be prepared  for the fiscal  years ended
December 31, 1996 and 1997 and the nine months  ended  September  30, 1998.  The
Company will  prepare the items in (i) and (ii) above,  include them in Schedule
1.3 and deliver them prior to the Closing. The Company will prepare the items in
(iii) above, include them in Schedule 1.3 and deliver them on or before December
31, 1998 or at the Closing, whichever is later.

             1.4  "COMPANY  SHARES"  means the shares of the common stock of the
Company,  no par value per share,  which have been  issued and which are held by
the Selling Shareholders.

             1.5 "PURCHASER FINANCIAL STATEMENTS" means the audited consolidated
financial statements of the Purchaser for the 1996 and 1997 Fiscal Years and its
unaudited  financial  statements  for the six months  ended June 30,  1998.  The
Purchaser has previously delivered the consolidated financial statements for the
1996 and 1997 Fiscal  Years to the Selling  Shareholders,  which are included in
Schedule 1.5. The Purchaser will prepare its unaudited financial  statements for
the six months  ended June 30,  1998,  include  them in Schedule 1.5 and deliver
them to the Selling Shareholders prior to the Closing.

                                       -2-
<PAGE>
             1.6  "CONFIDENTIAL   INFORMATION"  means  (i)  any  proprietary  or
confidential  information or know-how  whether or not in written form and refers
to any information, not generally known in the relevant trade or industry, which
was obtained  from one of the parties to this  Agreement,  or which was learned,
discovered,  developed,  conceived, originated or prepared by one of the parties
or its employees or agents or  representatives  in the scope of their employment
or consultancy;  (ii) customer lists and related data base  information,  vendor
lists and related data base information,  including  existing and after acquired
vendors,  product lines, including, but not limited to, any new lines or vendors
brought in by any employee,  invoices,  purchase orders,  and related  documents
containing customer and vendor information, marketing strategy, buying strategy,
including names and lists of buyers, cost structures,  methods and strategies on
approaching vendors and suppliers,  software, technical and business information
relating  to  a  party's  inventions  or  products,  research  and  development,
production  processes,  manufacturing  and engineering  processes,  machines and
equipment,  finances,  marketing and  production  and future plans and any other
information  which  is  identified  by  a  party  as  confidential;   and  (iii)
information  related to pricing,  commissions,  methods,  processes,  suppliers,
financial data, lists, computer programs,  software or procedures,  discoveries,
improvements,   inventions,  ideas,  lists,  apparatus,   statistics,  programs,
research,  development,  or related  information of the Purchaser or the Company
and the Selling Shareholders.

                                    ARTICLE 2

                                PURCHASE AND SALE

             2.1 PURCHASE AND SALE. Upon the terms and subject to the conditions
contained  herein,  the Selling  Shareholders,  agree to sell and  transfer  the
Company  Shares to the Purchaser,  and the Purchaser  agrees to purchase and pay
for the Company  Shares by issuing  restricted  Purchaser  Shares to the Selling
Shareholders  in accordance with Schedule 2.1. Such purchase and sale shall take
place at a closing (the  "Closing") to be held at the offices of the  Purchaser,
1600 California  Circle,  Milpitas,  California,  95035 on the date  established
pursuant to Section  11.1,  "Closing  Date" (the  "Closing  Date").  The parties
intend  that  the  exchange  of the  Company  Shares  for the  Purchaser  Shares
contemplated by this Agreement will be a tax-free  reorganization  under Section
368(a)(1)(B) of the Internal Revenue Code, as amended.

                                       -3-
<PAGE>
                                    ARTICLE 3

                 REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES OF THE PURCHASER

             Except  as  disclosed  in the  Disclosure  Schedules  noted in this
Article 3 to be delivered by the  Purchaser  to the Selling  Shareholders  on or
before June 25, 1998 and subsequently  disclosed in any Supplemental  Disclosure
Schedules  to be delivered by the  Purchaser to the Selling  Shareholders  on or
before  the  Closing  Date,  or  thereafter  in the  case of  certain  Purchaser
Financial  Statements,  the  Purchaser  represents  and  warrants to the Selling
Shareholders as of the date hereof and as of the Closing Date as follows:

             3.1  AUTHORITY AND  VALIDITY.  This  Agreement is valid and binding
upon the Purchaser and neither the execution nor the delivery of this  Agreement
by  the  Purchaser,  nor  the  performance  by it of any  of  the  covenants  or
obligations  to be performed by the Purchaser  hereunder,  after the  conditions
precedent to its  obligations set forth in Article 9,  "Conditions  Precedent to
Obligations of the Purchaser," have been satisfied, will result in any violation
of any order,  decree or judgment of any court or other  governmental  body,  or
statute or law  applicable  to the  Purchaser,  or in any breach of any terms or
provisions of the Purchaser's Articles of Incorporation or Bylaws, or constitute
a default  under any  indenture,  mortgage,  deed of trust or other  contract to
which the Purchaser is a party or by which it is bound, or cause the creation of
a lien or encumbrance on any properties owned by it or leased to it.

             3.2 GOVERNMENT APPROVALS. No consent, approval or authorization of,
or notification to or registration with, any governmental  authority is required
in connection with the execution,  delivery and performance of this Agreement by
the Purchaser.

             3.3 ORGANIZATION. The Purchaser is a corporation duly incorporated,
validly  existing and in good standing under the laws of the State of Nevada and
has full  corporate  power and  authority  to carry on its business as now being
conducted  and to  execute,  deliver  and  perform  its  obligations  under this
Agreement.

             3.4 FINANCIAL STATEMENTS. The Purchaser Financial Statements,  with
accompanying notes, made available by the Purchaser to the Selling  Shareholders
and the Company,  fairly present the financial  position of the Purchaser at the
dates of the Purchaser Financial Statements and the results of

                                       -4-
<PAGE>
its operations  and changes in its financial  position for the years and periods
ended on such dates,  in  conformity  with  accounting  principles  as generally
accepted and consistently applied.

             3.5 ABSENCE OF CHANGE. There has been no material adverse change in
the business, properties or the consolidated condition,  financial or otherwise,
of the Purchaser since December 31, 1997.

             3.6  CAPITALIZATION.  The authorized capital stock of the Purchaser
consists of 25,000,000  shares,  par value $.001 per share,  of which  1,500,000
shares are issued and  outstanding.  The  Purchaser  Shares are validly  issued,
fully  paid  and   nonassessable.   The  Purchase  Shares  constitute  the  only
outstanding  shares  of the  capital  stock  of  the  Purchaser  of  any  nature
whatsoever, voting and nonvoting. The records of the Purchaser's transfer agent,
Colonial  Stock  Transfer,  4455 East 400 S.,  Suite 100,  Salt Lake City,  Utah
84111,  as set forth on Schedule  3.6,  are accurate in all respects and reflect
all of the issued and  outstanding  shares of capital stock of the Company.  All
shares of capital stock of the Purchaser  are required to be  certificated,  and
the  Purchaser has not executed and  delivered  any  certificates  for shares in
excess of the number of issued  shares of the  Purchaser  set forth in  Schedule
3.6. There are, and at the closing will be, no outstanding options,  warrants or
other rights for the purchase of, or any securities  convertible  into,  capital
stock of the Company, whether issued, unissued or held in its treasury.

             3.7 DISCLOSURE STATEMENT. Set forth as Schedule 3.7 is a Disclosure
Statement constituting the Purchaser's filings in compliance with the disclosure
requirements  of Rule 15c2-11  under the  Securities  Exchange  Act of 1934,  as
amended (the  "Exchange  Act").  The  information  with respect to the Purchaser
contained in the Disclosure  Statement does not contain any untrue  statement of
material  fact or omit to state a material  fact  necessary in order to make the
statements  made in the  Disclosure  Statement  and the  Schedules  thereto  not
misleading.

             3.8 NO  SUBSIDIARIES.  The Purchaser does not own five percent (5%)
or  more  of the  voting  securities  of any  corporation  (or  would  own  such
securities in such amount upon the closing of any existing purchase  obligations
for securities).

             3.9 FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS.  The Purchaser Financial Statements that
have been provided to the Selling  Shareholders  (i) have been prepared from the
books and records of the Purchaser

                                       -5-
<PAGE>
and (ii) fairly and accurately present the financial  condition of the Purchaser
as of the date  thereof  and,  except as  disclosed  therein,  were  prepared in
accordance with generally accepted accounting principles,  and (iii) contain and
reflect all necessary  adjustments  for a fair and accurate  presentation of the
financial  condition as of such date.  Except as and to the extent  reflected or
reserved against in such Purchaser  Financial  Statements,  otherwise  expressly
disclosed  therein or as  disclosed  in  Schedule  3.11,  the  Purchaser  has no
liabilities or obligations,  contingent or otherwise, of a nature required to be
reflected in the Purchaser  Financial  Statements,  in accordance with generally
accepted accounting principles.

             3.10  ABSENCE OF CERTAIN  CHANGES.  Except as set forth in Schedule
3.10 or as otherwise  provided herein,  the Purchaser has not since December 31,
1997:

                         3.10.1 Suffered any material change adversely affecting
its assets, liabilities, financial condition or business;

                         3.10.2  Made a  material  change  in  the  compensation
payable or to become payable to any of its employees or agents,  or in any bonus
payments or arrangements made to or with any of its employees or agents;

                         3.10.3 Paid or declared any  dividends  or  distributed
any of its assets of any kind whatsoever to any of its shareholders;

                         3.10.4  Issued any stock,  or granted any stock options
or warrants to purchase stock;

                         3.10.5  Sold  or  transferred  any  of  its  assets  or
canceled any indebtedness or claims owing to it except in the ordinary course of
business, consistent with its past practices;

                         3.10.6  Sold,  assigned or  transferred  any  formulas,
inventions,  patents, patent applications,  trademarks, trade names, copyrights,
licenses, computer programs or software, know-how or other intangible assets;

                                       -6-
<PAGE>
                         3.10.7 Amended or terminated any contract, agreement or
license to which it is a party otherwise than in the ordinary course of business
or as may be necessary or appropriate for the  consummation of the  transactions
described in this Agreement;

                         3.10.8  Borrowed  any money or  incurred,  directly  or
indirectly  (as a  guarantor  or  otherwise),  any  indebtedness  except  in the
ordinary course of business, consistent with its past practices;

                         3.10.9  Discharged or satisfied any lien or encumbrance
or paid any obligation or liability (absolute or contingent), other than current
liabilities shown on the Purchaser  Financial  Statements or current liabilities
incurred since such date in the ordinary course of business, consistent with its
past practices;

                         3.10.10 Mortgaged, pledged or subjected to lien, charge
or other encumbrance any of its assets; or

                         3.10.11  Entered into or  committed to any  transaction
other than transactions in the ordinary course of business, consistent with past
practices.

             3.11  CONTRACTS AND OTHER  DOCUMENTS.  Attached  hereto as Schedule
3.11 is a complete  schedule  listing all  documents to which the Purchaser is a
party or under  which it has any  liability  in excess of $5,000 per annum.  All
such contracts,  documents and agreements  listed on Schedule 3.11 are valid and
enforceable and accurate and complete  copies of such  contracts,  documents and
agreements (or, with the consent of the Selling  Shareholders  forms thereof) as
have been  requested  by the  Selling  Shareholders  have been  provided  to the
Selling Shareholders. Except as disclosed on Schedule 3.11 hereof, the Purchaser
is not or will not be,  merely  with the passage of time,  in default  under any
such contract,  including those listed on Schedule 3.11.  Except as specified on
Schedule 3.11,  there is no  requirement  for any contract or agreement to which
the  Purchaser  is a party to be  novated  or to have the  consent  of the other
contracting party in order for the contract or agreement to be valid,  effective
and enforceable by the Purchaser  after the Closing as it was immediately  prior
thereto.

             3.12  TITLE  TO  PROPERTIES  AND  ASSETS.  Except  as set  forth in
Schedule  3.12, the Purchaser does not presently own or lease any real property.
The Purchaser has good title to all tangible

                                       -7-
<PAGE>
personal  property  reflected  on its books and records as owned by it, free and
clear of all liens and encumbrances, except (i) liens for current taxes and (ii)
other  liens  or  encumbrances  that  do not  materially  impair  the use of the
property subject  thereto.  Such tangible  personal  property is in satisfactory
condition  and suitable  for the purpose for which it is being used,  subject in
each case to  consumption  in the ordinary  course,  ordinary  wear and tear and
ordinary repair, maintenance and periodic replacement.

             3.13  ABSENCE OF  UNDISCLOSED  LIABILITIES.  Except as set forth in
Schedule  3.13,  the  Purchaser  is not  subject to any  liabilities,  including
contingent liabilities, liabilities for unperformed obligations, and liabilities
for unasserted claims.

             3.14 ABSENCE OF PENSION LIABILITY.

                         3.14.1 The  Purchaser has no liability of any nature to
any person or entity for pension or retirement obligations,  vested or unvested,
to or for the benefit of any of its existing or former employees.

                         3.14.2   The    consummation   of   the    transactions
contemplated by this Agreement will not entitle any employee of the Purchaser to
severance  pay,  unemployment  compensation  or any  other  payment,  except  as
expressly provided in this Agreement, including the Schedules, or accelerate the
time of payment or increase the amount of compensation due to any such employee.

                         3.14.3  Except  as set  forth  on  Schedule  3.14,  the
Purchaser  presently has no employee  benefit plans and has no announced plan or
legally binding commitment to create any employee benefit plans.

             3.15  ABSENCE  OF  LIENS.  There  are  no  outstanding  mechanics',
materialmen's',  laborers' or other liens or  encumbrances  filed or enforceable
against any property owned by or in the possession of the Purchaser,  or, to the
best  knowledge of the  Purchaser,  threatened  to be filed against any property
owned by the Purchaser or in its possession, which properly may be filed against
such property or which are the subject of any lawsuit against the Purchaser.

                                       -8-
<PAGE>
             3.16 TAX RETURNS. The Purchaser (and any predecessor corporation or
partnership  as to which  either of them is the  transferee  or  successor)  has
filed,  or has secured an extension  and will (within the  permitted  extension)
file, all tax returns,  including federal, state, local and foreign tax returns,
tax  reports  and  forms,  as to which  the due date for  filing is prior to the
Closing Date;  has reported all reportable  income on such returns;  has adopted
and followed in the preparation of such returns  methods of accounting  accepted
by law, and has not changed any methods of accounting  without  compliance  with
procedures  required by law; has not deducted any expenses or charges or claimed
any credits which are not allowable;  and has paid, or accrued and reserved for,
all  taxes,  penalties  and  interest  shown  to be due or  required  to be paid
pursuant  to the  returns as filed,  or as adjusted  pursuant  to  amendment  or
correction.  The Purchaser has no knowledge of any claim for taxes, penalties or
interest  thereon  in  addition  to those for which  such  taxes,  penalties  or
interest have been paid or accrued.

             3.17 SECURITIES LAW MATTERS.

                         3.17.1 The Purchaser is a publicly  owned company whose
shares  of  capital  stock  are not  actively  traded.  The  Purchaser  is not a
reporting company under the Exchange Act;

                         3.17.2 The Purchaser has :

                                      3.17.2.1 offered and sold 1,000,000 shares
of its Common Stock in an offering exempt from  registration  under Section 5 in
compliance with the Securities Act of 1933, as amended (the "Securities Act") by
virtue of Rule 504 under  Regulation D under the Securities Act, and offered and
sold such shares  within the State of Nevada in compliance  with the  applicable
securities  laws of such state,  and the purchasers of such shares are set forth
in Schedule 3.17.2.1;

                                      3.17.2.2  offered and sold 500,000  shares
of its Common Stock in an offering exempt from  registration  under Section 5 of
the  Securities  Act by virtue of Section 4(2) of the Securities Act and offered
and  sold  such  shares  within  the  State of  Nevada  in  compliance  with the
applicable securities of such state;

                                      3.17.2.3 and the officers and directors of
the Purchaser have, to the best of the knowledge of Thomas Hofer ("Hofer"), made
no statements to the Purchaser's shareholders

                                       -9-
<PAGE>
or third parties  respecting the  Purchaser's  acquisition of the Company or any
particular return that a shareholder may expect on such shareholder's investment
in the Purchaser's Common Stock;

                                      3.17.2.4 met all  applicable  requirements
to have its Common Stock traded,  and its Common Stock does trade, on the Nasdaq
Bulletin Board;

                                      3.17.2.5  prepared the  disclosures  to be
included in the filing made by Alpine Securities Corporation to comply with Rule
15c2-11 of the Exchange Act;

                                      3.17.2.6  made  all  filings  and  reports
required under all local, state and federal laws with respect to its business or
any predecessor entity or partnership; and

                                      3.17.2.7  made  all  filings  and  reports
required by the Securities and Exchange Commission ("SEC").

                         3.17.3 The Purchaser is purchasing  the Company  Shares
for its own  account and for  investment  and not with a view to, or for sale in
connection with, any distribution of the Company Shares.

             3.18  LITIGATION.  There are no  lawsuits,  arbitration  actions or
other proceedings (equitable, legal, administrative or otherwise) pending or (to
the best of the Purchaser's  knowledge)  threatened,  or any customer complaints
which have not been resolved or settled, and there are no investigations pending
or threatened against the Purchaser (or involving the industry in which they are
members)  which  relate  to and  could  have a  material  adverse  effect on the
properties,  businesses  or assets of the  Purchaser  or which  could  adversely
affect the validity or  enforceability  of this  Agreement or the  obligation or
ability of the Purchaser to perform its  obligations  under this Agreement or to
carry out the transactions contemplated by this Agreement.

             3.19  COMPLIANCE  WITH LAWS.  The Purchaser has  conducted,  and is
continuing  to conduct,  its  business in material  compliance  with,  and is in
material compliance with, all applicable statutes, orders, rules and regulations
promulgated by governmental  authorities relating in any material respect to its
operations,  conduct  of  business  or use  of  properties,  including,  without
limitation,  any applicable  statute,  order, rule or regulation relating to (i)
wages, hours, hiring, nondiscrimination,

                                      -10-
<PAGE>
retirement,  benefits,  pensions,  working  conditions,  and  worker  safety and
health;  (ii) air, water, toxic substances,  noise, or solid,  gaseous or liquid
waste generation,  handling,  storage, disposal or transportation;  (iii) zoning
and building codes; (iv) the production, storage, processing, advertising, sale,
distribution,  transportation,  disposal,  use and warranty of products;  or (v)
trade and antitrust regulations. The execution, delivery and performance of this
Agreement  by  the  Purchaser  and  the  consummation  by the  Purchaser  of the
transactions  contemplated  by this Agreement  will not,  separately or jointly,
violate,  contravene  or  constitute a default  under any  applicable  statutes,
orders, rules and regulations promulgated by governmental authorities or cause a
lien on any  property  used,  owned or leased  by the  Purchaser  to be  created
thereunder.  There are no proposed changes in any applicable  statutes,  orders,
rules and regulations  promulgated by governmental  authorities that would cause
any representation or warranty contained in this Section to be untrue.

             3.20  CERTAIN  ACTIVITIES.  The  Purchaser  has  not,  directly  or
indirectly, engaged in or been a party to any of the following activities:

                         3.20.1 Bribes, kickbacks or gratuities to any person or
entity, including domestic or foreign government officials or any other payments
to any such persons or entity,  whether legal or not legal,  to obtain or retain
business or to receive favorable treatment of any nature with regard to business
(excluding  commissions  or  gratuities  paid or given in full  compliance  with
applicable  law and  constituting  ordinary and necessary  expenses  incurred in
carrying on its business in the ordinary course);

                         3.20.2 Contributions  (including gifts),  whether legal
or not  legal,  made to any  domestic  or  foreign  political  party,  political
candidate or holder of political office;

                         3.20.3  Holding of or  participation  in bank accounts,
funds or pools  of  funds  created  or  maintained  in the U.S.  or any  foreign
country,  without being  reflected on the corporate  books of account,  or as to
which receipts or disbursements therefrom have not been reflected on such books,
the  purpose of which is to obtain or retain  business  or to receive  favorable
treatment with regard to business;

                                      -11-
<PAGE>
                         3.20.4  Receiving  or  disbursing  monies,  the  actual
nature of which has been improperly disguised or intentionally misrecorded on or
improperly omitted from the corporate books of account;

                         3.20.5  Paying fees to domestic or foreign  consultants
or  commercial  agents  which  exceed the  reasonable  value of the ordinary and
customary consulting and agency services purported to have been rendered;

                         3.20.6   Paying  or   reimbursing   (including   gifts)
personnel of the Purchaser for the purpose of enabling them to expend time or to
make  contributions  or payments of the kind or for the purposes  referred to in
Paragraphs 3.20.1 through 3.20.5 above;

                         3.20.7  Participating  in any  manner  in any  activity
which is  illegal  under the  international  boycott  provisions  of the  Export
Administration Act, as amended,  or the international  boycott provisions of the
Internal Revenue Code, or guidelines or regulations thereunder; and

                         3.20.8   Making   or   permitting   unlawful   charges,
mischarges or defective or fraudulent  pricing under any contract or subcontract
under a contract with any  department,  agency or  subdivision  thereof,  of the
United States government, state or municipal government or foreign government.

             3.21 INSURANCE COVERAGE.  All policies of fire,  liability or other
forms of insurance  which the  Purchaser  has obtained are set forth on Schedule
3.21.  All of the  insurance  represented  by such policies is in full force and
effect.

             3.22  ARTICLES OF  INCORPORATION  AND BY-LAWS.  The  Purchaser  has
delivered to the Selling  Shareholders true, accurate and complete copies of the
Articles  of  Incorporation  and  By-Laws of the  Purchaser,  together  with all
amendments to each of the same as of the date of this Agreement.

             3.23  CORPORATE  MINUTES.  The minute books of the  Purchaser  made
available for  inspection by the Selling  Shareholders  prior to the Closing are
the correct and only such minute books and contain complete and accurate records
of any and all  proceedings  and  actions  at all  meetings  (including  written
consents executed in lieu of meetings) of its shareholder and Board of Directors
and

                                      -12-
<PAGE>
committees thereof, through the Closing Date. The stock records of the Purchaser
made available for inspection by the Selling  Shareholders  prior to the Closing
are the correct  and only such stock  records  and each  accurately  reflect all
issues and transfers of record of the capital stock of the Purchaser.

             3.24 DEFAULT ON  INDEBTEDNESS.  The  Purchaser is not in default in
any respect under any evidence of indebtedness for borrowed money.

             3.25 CONSENTS.  The Purchaser does not require any  authorizations,
consents,  approvals  and waivers or other actions in order to make any license,
lease,  contract  or  agreement  listed  under  Schedule  3.13  valid  and fully
enforceable  by the Purchaser and effective  after the issuance of the Purchaser
Shares to the Selling Shareholders as such license, lease, contract or agreement
was immediately prior thereto.

             3.26 INDEBTEDNESS TO PURCHASER. No employee, officer or director of
the Purchaser or any third party is indebted to the Purchaser.

             3.27 COMPLETENESS OF REPRESENTATIONS  AND SCHEDULES.  The Schedules
hereto,  where applicable to the Purchaser,  completely and correctly present in
all  material  respects  the  information  required  by  this  Agreement.   This
Agreement, the certificates to be delivered by the Purchaser at the Closing, the
Schedules  and the  provisions  of this Article 3, and the documents and written
information pertaining to the Purchaser furnished to the Selling Shareholders or
their  agents  by or on behalf  of the  Purchaser,  do not  contain  any  untrue
statement of a material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary in order
to make this Agreement,  or such certificates,  schedules,  documents or written
information not misleading.

                                    ARTICLE 4

             REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES OF SELLING SHAREHOLDERS

             Except  as  disclosed  in the  Disclosure  Schedules  noted in this
Article 4 and Article 5,  "Representations and Warranties of the Company," to be
delivered  by the Selling  Shareholders  and the Company to the  Purchaser on or
before June 25, 1998 and subsequently  disclosed in any Supplemental  Disclosure
Schedules  to be delivered  by the Selling  Shareholders  and the Company to the
Purchaser on the Closing  Date,  or  thereafter  in the case of certain  Company
Financial Statements, the

                                      -13-
<PAGE>
Selling  Shareholders  hereby  represent  and warrant to the Purchaser as of the
date hereof and as of the Closing Date as follows:

             4.1 AUTHORITY AND VALIDITY.

                         4.1.1  This  Agreement  is valid and  binding  upon the
Selling Shareholders and neither the execution nor delivery of this Agreement by
the Selling  Shareholders nor the performance by the Selling Shareholders of any
of their respective covenants or obligations hereunder will constitute a default
under any contract,  agreement or  obligation to which the Selling  Shareholders
are a party or by which  the  Selling  Shareholders  or any of their  respective
properties is bound. This Agreement is enforceable severally against the Selling
Shareholders in accordance with its terms.

                         4.1.2 The execution,  delivery and  performance of this
Agreement by the Company have been duly  authorized  by its Board of  Directors.
This Agreement is valid and binding upon the Company, and is enforceable against
the  Company  in  accordance  with  its  terms.  The  execution,   delivery  and
performance of this Agreement by the Company will not result in the violation or
breach of any term or provision of charter instruments applicable to the Company
or constitute a default under any  indenture,  mortgage,  deed of trust or other
contract or  agreement  to which the Company is a party or by which it or any of
its  properties is bound,  or cause the creation of a lien or encumbrance on any
properties owned by or leased to or by it.

             4.2 GOVERNMENTAL APPROVALS.  No consent,  approval or authorization
of, or notification to or registration with, any governmental authority,  either
federal, state or local, is required in connection with the execution,  delivery
and performance of this Agreement by the Selling Shareholders or the Company.

             4.3  TITLE.  Each of the  Selling  Shareholders  has full right and
title to the number of the Company  Shares set forth opposite his or her name in
Schedule 4.3; such Company  Shares  constitute  all the Company Shares which are
owned, directly or indirectly,  by the Selling Shareholders;  and at the time of
transfer  thereof to the Purchaser,  all of the Company Shares to be transferred
by the Selling Shareholders will be free of all liens, claims or encumbrances of
any kind, and will be fully transferable to the Purchaser.

                                      -14-
<PAGE>
             4.4  ORGANIZATION  AND GOOD STANDING.  The Company is a corporation
duly  organized  and  existing in good  standing  under the laws of the State of
California.  The Company has full corporate  power and authority to carry on its
business as now  conducted  and to own or lease and operate the  properties  and
assets now owned or leased and operated by it. The Company is duly  qualified to
transact  business  in all states and  jurisdictions  in which the  business  or
ownership  of  its  property  makes  it  necessary  so to  qualify  (other  than
jurisdictions  in which the nature of the property owned or business  conducted,
when  considered  in  relation  to the  absence  of serious  penalties,  renders
qualification as a foreign corporation unnecessary as a practical matter).

             4.5  CAPITALIZATION.  The  authorized  capital stock of the Company
consists  solely of Company  Shares,  as set forth in Schedule  4.5. The Company
Shares are validly issued, are fully paid and  nonassessable,  and subject to no
restrictions  on transfer.  The Company Shares  constitute the only  outstanding
shares of the capital stock of the Company of any nature whatsoever,  voting and
non-voting.  All shares of  capital  stock of the  Company  are  required  to be
certificated,  and the Company has executed and  delivered no  certificates  for
shares in excess of the number of issued  shares of the Company set forth above.
There are, and at Closing  will be, no  outstanding  options,  warrants or other
rights for the purchase of, or any securities convertible into, capital stock of
the Company, whether issued, unissued or held in its treasury.

             4.6 NO SUBSIDIARIES.  The Company does not own five percent (5%) or
more of the voting  securities of any  corporation (or would own such securities
in such  amount  upon the  closing  of any  existing  purchase  obligations  for
securities).

             4.7 FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS.  The Company Financial  Statements which
have been  provided to the  Purchaser  (i) have been prepared from the books and
records of the Company and (ii) fairly and  accurately  presents  the  financial
condition  of the  Company  as of the date  thereof  and,  except  as  disclosed
therein,   were  prepared  in  accordance  with  generally  accepted  accounting
principles,  and (iii) contain and reflect all necessary  adjustments for a fair
and accurate  presentation of the financial condition as of such date. Except as
and to the  extent  reflected  or  reserved  against in such  Company  Financial
Statements,  or  otherwise  expressly  disclosed  therein,  the  Company  has no
liabilities or obligations,  contingent or otherwise, of a nature required to be
reflected in the Company  Financial  Statements,  in accordance  with  generally
accepted accounting principles.

                                      -15-
<PAGE>
             4.8 DISCLOSURE STATEMENT.  Set forth as Exhibit 4.8 is a disclosure
statement ("Disclosure  Statement") of the Company. The information with respect
to the Company is contained in the Disclosure  Statement and does not contain an
untrue  statement of material fact or omit to state a material fact necessary in
order to make the statements  made in the Disclosure  Statement and the exhibits
thereto not misleading.

             4.9 ABSENCE OF CERTAIN CHANGES. Except as set forth in Schedule 4.9
or otherwise provided herein, the Company has not since December 31, 1997:

                         4.9.1 Suffered any material change adversely  affecting
its assets, liabilities, financial condition or business;

                         4.9.2  Made  a  material  change  in  the  compensation
payable or to become payable to any of its employees or agents,  or in any bonus
payments or arrangements made to or with any of its employees or agents;

                         4.9.3 Paid or declared any dividends or distributed any
of its assets of any kind whatsoever to any of its shareholders;

                         4.9.4 Issued any stock, or granted any stock options or
warrants to purchase stock;

                         4.9.5 Sold or transferred any of its assets or canceled
any  indebtedness  or  claims  owing to it  except  in the  ordinary  course  of
business, consistent with its past practices;

                         4.9.6  Sold,  assigned  or  transferred  any  formulas,
inventions,  patents, patent applications,  trademarks, trade names, copyrights,
licenses, computer programs or software, know-how or other intangible assets;

                         4.9.7 Amended or terminated any contract,  agreement or
license to which it is a party otherwise than in the ordinary course of business
or as may be necessary or appropriate for the  consummation of the  transactions
described in this Agreement;

                                      -16-
<PAGE>
                         4.9.8  Borrowed  any  money or  incurred,  directly  or
indirectly  (as a  guarantor  or  otherwise),  any  indebtedness  except  in the
ordinary course of business, consistent with its past practices;

                         4.9.9  Discharged or satisfied any lien or  encumbrance
or paid any obligation or liability (absolute or contingent), other than current
liabilities  shown on the Company  Financial  Statements or current  liabilities
incurred since such date in the ordinary course of business, consistent with its
past practices;

                         4.9.10 Mortgaged,  pledged or subjected to lien, charge
or other encumbrance any of its assets; or

                         4.9.11  Entered into or  committed  to any  transaction
other than transactions in the ordinary course of business, consistent with past
practices.

             4.10  CONTRACTS AND OTHER  DOCUMENTS.  Attached  hereto as Schedule
4.10 is a complete  schedule  listing of all documents to which the Company is a
party or under which it has any  liability.  All such  contracts,  documents and
agreements  listed on Schedule 4.10 are valid and  enforceable  and accurate and
complete  copies of such  contracts,  documents  and  agreements  (or,  with the
consent of the Purchaser, forms thereof) as have been requested by the Purchaser
have been  provided to the  Purchaser.  Except as  disclosed  on  Schedule  4.10
hereof,  the Company is not or will not be,  merely with the passage of time, in
default under any such contract, including those listed on Schedule 4.10. Except
as  specified  on Schedule  4.10,  there is no  requirement  for any contract or
agreement  to which the  Company is a party to be novated or to have the consent
of the other  contracting  party in order for the  contract or  agreement  to be
valid,  effective  and  enforceable  by the Company  after the Closing as it was
immediately prior thereto.

             4.11  TITLE  TO  PROPERTIES  AND  ASSETS.  Except  as set  forth in
Schedule  4.11,  the Company does not presently own or lease any real  property.
The Company has good title to all tangible  personal  property  reflected on its
books and records as owned by it, free and clear of all liens and  encumbrances,
except (i) liens for current taxes, and (ii) other liens or encumbrances that do
not materially  impair the use of the property  subject  thereto.  Such tangible
personal property is in satisfactory  condition and suitable for the purpose for
which it is being used, subject in each case to

                                      -17-
<PAGE>
consumption in the ordinary course,  ordinary wear and tear and ordinary repair,
maintenance and periodic replacement.

             4.12 ABSENCE OF UNDISCLOSED LIABILITIES. The Company is not subject
to  any  liabilities,   including   contingent   liabilities,   liabilities  for
unperformed  obligations,  and  liabilities  for unasserted  claims,  other than
liabilities and obligations incurred in the ordinary course of business, none of
which is materially adverse.

             4.13 ABSENCE OF PENSION LIABILITY.

                         4.13.1 The  Company has no  liability  of any nature to
any person or entity for pension or retirement obligations,  vested or unvested,
to or for the benefit of any of its existing or former employees.

                         4.13.2   The    consummation   of   the    transactions
contemplated  by this  Agreement will not entitle any employee of the Company to
severance  pay,  unemployment  compensation  or any  other  payment,  except  as
expressly provided in this Agreement, including the Schedules, or accelerate the
time of payment or increase the amount of compensation due to any such employee.

                         4.13.3  Except  as set  forth  on  Schedule  4.13,  the
Company  presently has no employee  benefit  plans and has no announced  plan or
legally binding commitment to create any employee benefit plans.

             4.14 ABSENCE OF LIENS.  Except as set forth in Schedule 4.14, there
are no  outstanding  mechanics',  materialmens',  laborers'  or  other  liens or
encumbrances  filed  or  enforceable  against  any  property  owned by or in the
possession  of  the  Company,   or,  to  the  best   knowledge  of  the  Selling
Shareholders,  threatened to be filed against any property  owned by the Company
or in its possession, which properly may be filed against such property or which
are the subject of any lawsuit against the Company.

             4.15 TAX RETURNS.  The Company (and any predecessor  corporation or
partnership  as to which  either of them is the  transferee  or  successor)  has
timely filed, or has timely secured an

                                      -18-
<PAGE>
extension  and will  (within the  permitted  extension)  file,  all tax returns,
including federal,  state, local and foreign tax returns, tax reports and forms,
as to which the due date for filing is prior to the Closing  Date;  has reported
all  reportable  income  on  such  returns;  has  adopted  and  followed  in the
preparation of such returns  methods of accounting  accepted by law, and has not
changed any methods of accounting without compliance with procedures required by
law; has not  deducted any expenses or charges or claimed any credits  which are
not allowable;  and has paid, or accrued and reserved for, all taxes,  penalties
and interest  shown to be due or required to be paid  pursuant to the returns as
filed,  or  as  adjusted  pursuant  to  amendment  or  correction.  The  Selling
Shareholders  have no  knowledge  of any claim for taxes,  penalties or interest
thereon in addition to those for which such taxes,  penalties  or interest  have
been paid or accrued.

             4.16 LITIGATION. Except as set forth on Schedule 4.16, there are no
lawsuits,   arbitration   actions  or  other  proceedings   (equitable,   legal,
administrative   or   otherwise)   pending  or  (to  the  best  of  the  Selling
Shareholders'  knowledge) threatened,  or any customer complaints which have not
been resolved or settled, and there are no investigations pending or threatened,
against the Selling  Shareholders  or the Company (or  involving the industry in
which they are members) which relate to and could have a material adverse effect
on the properties,  businesses or assets of the Company or which could adversely
affect the validity or  enforceability  of this  Agreement or the  obligation or
ability of the Selling  Shareholders or the Company to perform their  respective
obligations  under this Agreement or to carry out the transactions  contemplated
by this Agreement.

             4.17  COMPLIANCE  WITH LAWS.  The  Company  has  conducted,  and is
continuing  to conduct,  its  business in material  compliance  with,  and is in
material compliance with, all applicable statutes, orders, rules and regulations
promulgated by governmental  authorities relating in any material respect to its
operations,  conduct  of  business  or use  of  properties,  including,  without
limitation,  any applicable  statute,  order, rule or regulation relating to (i)
wages, hours, hiring, nondiscrimination, retirement, benefits, pensions, working
conditions,  and worker safety and health;  (ii) air, water,  toxic  substances,
noise, or solid, gaseous or liquid waste generation, handling, storage, disposal
or  transportation;  (iii)  zoning  and  building  codes;  (iv) the  production,
storage, processing, advertising, sale, distribution,  transportation, disposal,
use and  warranty  of  products;  or (v) trade and  antitrust  regulations.  The
execution,   delivery  and   performance   of  this  Agreement  by  the  Selling
Shareholders  and the Company and the  consummation by the Selling  Shareholders
and the Company of the  transactions  contemplated  by this  Agreement will not,
separately or jointly, violate, contravene or constitute a default

                                      -19-
<PAGE>
under any applicable  statutes,  orders,  rules and  regulations  promulgated by
governmental  authorities or cause a lien on any property used,  owned or leased
by the Company to be created  thereunder.  There are no proposed  changes in any
applicable statutes,  orders, rules and regulations  promulgated by governmental
authorities that would cause any  representation  or warranty  contained in this
Section to be untrue.

             4.18  CERTAIN   ACTIVITIES.   The  Company  has  not,  directly  or
indirectly, engaged in or been a party to any of the following activities:

                         4.18.1 Bribes, kickbacks or gratuities to any person or
entity, including domestic or foreign government officials or any other payments
to any such persons or entity,  whether legal or not legal,  to obtain or retain
business or to receive favorable treatment of any nature with regard to business
(excluding  commissions  or  gratuities  paid or given in full  compliance  with
applicable  law and  constituting  ordinary and necessary  expenses  incurred in
carrying on its business in the ordinary course).

                         4.18.2 Contributions  (including gifts),  whether legal
or not  legal,  made to any  domestic  or  foreign  political  party,  political
candidate or holder of political office;

                         4.18.3  Holding of or  participation  in bank accounts,
funds or pools  of  funds  created  or  maintained  in the U.S.  or any  foreign
country,  without being  reflected on the corporate  books of account,  or as to
which receipts or disbursements therefrom have not been reflected on such books,
the  purpose of which is to obtain or retain  business  or to receive  favorable
treatment with regard to business;

                         4.18.4  Receiving  or  disbursing  monies,  the  actual
nature of which has been improperly disguised or intentionally misrecorded on or
improperly omitted from the corporate books of account;

                         4.18.5  Paying fees to domestic or foreign  consultants
or  commercial  agents  which  exceed the  reasonable  value of the ordinary and
customary consulting and agency services purported to have been rendered;

                                      -20-
<PAGE>
                         4.18.6   Paying  or   reimbursing   (including   gifts)
personnel  of the Company for the purpose of enabling  them to expend time or to
make  contributions  or payments of the kind or for the purposes  referred to in
Paragraphs 4.18.1 through 4.18.5 above;

                         4.18.7  Participating  in any  manner  in any  activity
which is  illegal  under the  international  boycott  provisions  of the  Export
Administration Act, as amended,  or the international  boycott provisions of the
Internal Revenue Code, or guidelines or regulations thereunder; and

                         4.18.8   Making   or   permitting   unlawful   charges,
mischarges or defective or fraudulent  pricing under any contract or subcontract
under a contract with any  department,  agency or  subdivision  thereof,  of the
United States government, state or municipal government or foreign government.

             4.19 INSURANCE COVERAGE.  All policies of fire,  liability or other
forms of  insurance  which the  Company has  obtained  are set forth on Schedule
4.19.  All of the  insurance  represented  by such policies is in full force and
effect.

             4.20  ARTICLES  OF  INCORPORATION  AND  BY-LAWS.  The  Company  has
delivered to the Purchaser true, accurate and complete copies of the Articles of
Incorporation  and By-Laws of the Company,  together with all amendments to each
of the same as of the date of this Agreement.

             4.21 CORPORATE  MINUTES.  The minute books of the Company delivered
to the  Purchaser  at the Closing are the correct and only such minute books and
do and will contain complete and accurate records of any and all proceedings and
actions  at all  meetings  (including  written  consents  executed  in  lieu  of
meetings) of its  shareholder  and Board of Directors  and  committees  thereof,
through the Closing  Date.  The stock  records of the Company  delivered  to the
Purchaser  at the Closing  are the correct and only such stock  records and each
accurately  reflect all issues and  transfers of record of the capital  stock of
the Company.

             4.22 DEFAULT ON INDEBTEDNESS.  The Company is not in default in any
respect under any evidence of indebtedness for borrowed money.

                                      -21-
<PAGE>
             4.23  CONSENTS.  The Company  does not require any  authorizations,
consents,  approvals  and waivers or other actions in order to make any license,
lease,  contract  or  agreement  listed  under  Schedule  4.23  valid  and fully
enforceable by the Selling  Shareholders and the Company and effective after the
issuance of the Company Shares to the Purchaser as such license, lease, contract
or agreement was immediately prior thereto.

             4.24  SATISFACTION  OF  INDEBTEDNESS.  Schedule 4.24 sets forth the
indebtedness  of  the  Selling   Shareholders,   any  employee  of  the  Selling
Shareholders, any employee of the Company, or any other party, to the Company.

             4.25 COMPLETENESS OF REPRESENTATIONS  AND SCHEDULES.  The Schedules
hereto, where applicable to the Selling Shareholders and the Company, completely
and correctly present in all material respects the information  required by this
Agreement.  This  Agreement,  the  certificates  to be  delivered by the Selling
Shareholders at the Closing, the Schedules and the provisions of this Article 4,
and the documents and written information pertaining to the Company furnished to
the Purchaser or its agents by or on behalf of the Selling  Shareholders  or the
Company, do not contain any untrue statement of a material fact or omit to state
a material fact necessary in order to make this Agreement, or such certificates,
schedules, documents or written information not misleading.

                                    ARTICLE 5

                  REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES OF THE COMPANY

             5.1 REPRESENTATIONS  AND WARRANTIES OF THE COMPANY.  Independent of
the  representations  and warranties of the Selling  Shareholders  in Article 4,
"Representations and Warranties of Selling Shareholders," the Company represents
and warrants to the Purchaser all of the matters regarding the Company set forth
in Sections  4.1, 4.2 and 4.4 through  4.25,  and matters  regarding the Company
specifically represented and warranted in those Sections to the knowledge of the
Selling  Shareholders  are  represented  and  warranted  in this  Section to the
knowledge of the Company.

                                      -22-
<PAGE>
                                    ARTICLE 6

        PRE-CLOSING COVENANTS OF THE SELLING SHAREHOLDERS AND THE COMPANY

             The Selling Shareholders and the Company independently covenant and
agree,  pending the Closing of the transactions  contemplated by this Agreement,
to comply with and perform, and hereby independently  represent and warrant that
as of the Closing they will have  complied  with and  performed,  the  following
covenants and undertakings.

             6.1 NO DISTRIBUTIONS TO SELLING SHAREHOLDERS.  The Company will not
pay or declare any  dividend on, or make any other  distribution  of, any of its
assets of any kind whatsoever to the Selling Shareholders,  or redeem,  purchase
or otherwise acquire any of its capital stock.

             6.2  ISSUANCE  OF CAPITAL  STOCK.  The  Company  will not issue any
stock,  or grant any stock options or warrants to purchase  stock,  or issue any
securities  convertible into its capital stock, for  consideration or otherwise,
except as provided for in this Agreement.

             6.3 ARTICLES OF  INCORPORATION  AND  BY-LAWS.  The Company will not
amend or alter in any way its Articles of  Incorporation  or By-Laws,  except to
change  the name of the  Company,  without  the  prior  written  consent  of the
Purchaser.

             6.4  OPERATIONS  OF THE  COMPANY.  Except as  contemplated  by this
Agreement,  the Company will conduct its  business  and  operations  only in the
ordinary course. Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, and except as
contemplated  by this  Agreement,  prior to the Closing Date,  without the prior
written  consent of the  Purchaser,  the Company  will not take any action which
would result in a breach of any  representation or warranty contained in Article
4,  "Representations  and  Warranties of Selling  Shareholders,"  and Article 5,
"Representations  and Warranties of the Company," as if such representations and
warranties were by their terms applicable to such period.

             6.5  TERMINATION  OF INTEREST IN THE  COMPANY  SHARES.  The Selling
Shareholders  shall take such actions as are  necessary to ensure that as of the
Closing  Date they have full right and title to,  and rights to convey,  all the
issued and  outstanding  shares of the  capital  stock of the  Company and there
shall be no  outstanding  options on, rights to or claims  regarding the capital
stock of the Company.

                                      -23-
<PAGE>
                                    ARTICLE 7

               POST-CLOSING COVENANTS BY THE SELLING SHAREHOLDERS

             7.1 RESALE OF PURCHASER  SHARES.  The Selling  Shareholders  hereby
agree  that for a period of one (1) year  after  the  receipt  of the  Purchaser
Shares, the Selling Shareholders will not offer or sell any of Purchaser Shares,
except with the prior written consent of the Purchaser, pursuant to an available
exemption  under  the  Securities  Act or to a  registration  statement.  If the
Purchaser has  registered  the sale of the Purchaser  Shares held by the Selling
Shareholders  with the SEC. In the case of such  registration,  the  Purchaser's
consent for any such offer and sale shall not be unreasonably withheld,  even if
such sale is made before the first  anniversary  of the issuance of the Purchase
Shares.  After  expiration  of said one-year  period,  any sale of the Purchaser
Shares must be pursuant to an available  exemption  from the  Securities Act and
shall also be subject to the  Purchaser's  consent,  which  consent shall not be
unreasonably  withheld.  The Selling  Shareholders agree to retain a copy of any
letter referenced above for a reasonable period and to furnish a copy thereof to
the Purchaser within ten (10) days after completion of any sale. As used herein,
"U.S.A." and "U.S.  Person" shall have the same  meanings as in the  certificate
legend set forth in Section 8.1.

                                    ARTICLE 8

                                 SECURITIES LAWS

             8.1 CERTIFICATES  EVIDENCING PURCHASER SHARES. The Purchaser Shares
delivered to the Selling  Shareholders  pursuant to Section 2.1,  "Purchase  and
Sale," shall be in registered form and bear the following legend:

             "THE SHARES  REPRESENTED  HEREBY HAVE NOT BEEN REGISTERED UNDER THE
             UNITED STATES  SECURITIES  ACT OF 1933 AND,  EXCEPT  PURSUANT TO AN
             EXEMPTION  THEREFROM OR  REGISTRATION OF THE SHARES UNDER SUCH ACT,
             MAY NOT BE OFFERED OR SOLD,  DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY,  IN THE UNITED
             STATES OF AMERICA,  INCLUDING THE STATES AND  POSSESSIONS AND OTHER
             AREAS SUBJECT TO ITS JURISDICTION (THE "U.S.A."), OR TO CITIZENS OR
             RESIDENTS  OF  THE  U.S.A.,  CORPORATIONS,  PARTNERSHIPS  OR  OTHER
             ENTITIES CREATED OR ORGANIZED IN OR UNDER THE LAWS OF THE U.S.A. OR
             ESTATES OR TRUSTS  THE INCOME OF WHICH IS SUBJECT TO UNITED  STATES
             FEDERAL INCOME TAXATION REGARD LESS OF ITS SOURCE ("U.S. PERSONS").
             SPECIFIC RESTRICTIONS ON REOFFERS AND RESALES OF THE SHARES ARE SET
             FORTH IN

                                      -24-
<PAGE>
             SECTION  7.1 OF THE STOCK  PURCHASE  AGREEMENT  UNDER  WHICH  THESE
             SHARES  WERE  ISSUED,  TO  WHICH  THE  OWNER  OF  SUCH  SHARES,  BY
             ACCEPTANCE  HEREOF,  ASSENTS.  COPIES OF THE FORM OF SECTION 7.1 OF
             SUCH STOCK PURCHASE AGREEMENT CAN BE OBTAINED FROM THE SECRETARY OF
             THE CORPORATION UPON REQUEST."

             8.2  REPRESENTATION AND WARRANTY BY THE SELLING  SHAREHOLDERS.  The
Selling Shareholders, represent and warrant to the Purchaser that:

                         8.2.1 The  Selling  Shareholders  have  been  furnished
information concerning the Purchaser in the Disclosure Statement,  including the
Purchaser's  Financial  Statements,  have  had an  opportunity  to  discuss  the
Purchaser's  business  and affairs with its  executives  in order to secure such
further information about the Purchaser as the Selling Shareholders have desired
to receive and have not looked to the  Purchaser,  or any agents or employees of
the Purchaser, to provide them with any information except for such documents as
have  been  specifically  requested  and  delivered  prior  to the  date of this
Agreement;

                         8.2.2  The  Selling  Shareholders  have  knowledge  and
experience  in  financial  and  business  matters  such that they are capable of
evaluating the merits and risks of the  prospective  investment in the Purchaser
Shares to be received hereunder;

                         8.2.3  The  Selling   Shareholders   are  and  will  be
accepting the Purchaser  Shares for their respective own accounts for investment
and not with a view to, or for sale in connection  with, any distribution of the
Purchaser Shares; and

                         8.2.4 The Selling  Shareholders  acknowledge  that they
are  aware  that  the  Purchaser  Shares  have  not been  registered  under  the
Securities Act, that the Purchaser  Shares may not be offered or sold within the
U.S.A.  or to U.S.  Persons (as defined in the legend  contained in Section 8.1)
unless an exemption  from such  registration  is available or that the Purchaser
has  registered  the  Purchaser  Shares  under  the  Securities  Act,  and that,
accordingly,  it must bear the economic risk of the  investment in the Purchaser
Shares for an indefinite period of time.

                                      -25-
<PAGE>
                                    ARTICLE 9

              CONDITIONS PRECEDENT TO OBLIGATIONS OF THE PURCHASER

             The  obligations  of the Purchaser  under this  Agreement  shall be
subject to the  satisfaction,  on or prior to the  Closing  Date,  of all of the
following conditions, any one or more of which may be waived by the Purchaser:

             9.1  REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES  ACCURATE.  All representations
and  warranties of the Selling  Shareholders  and the Company  contained in this
Agreement  shall have been true in all material  respects when made, and also at
and as of the Closing Date as if such  representations  and warranties were made
at and as of the  Closing  Date.  The  Selling  Shareholders  shall  furnish the
Purchaser with a certificate, dated the Closing Date and signed on behalf of the
Company by a duly authorized officer thereof,  and by the Selling  Shareholders,
stating  the  above  in  such  form as the  Purchaser  may  reasonably  request.
Acceptance of the Purchaser Shares by the Selling  Shareholders shall constitute
an affirmation by the Selling Shareholders of the truth, as of the Closing Date,
of the  representations  and  warranties  made by them  in this  Agreement.  Any
Supplemental  Disclosure  Schedules  prepared  by the Selling  Shareholders  and
delivered  to the  Purchaser  after June 25, 1998 shall be subject to review and
acceptance by the Purchaser as of the Closing Date, in its sole discretion.

             9.2 PERFORMANCE BY THE SELLING SHAREHOLDERS AND THE COMPANY.

                         9.2.1 The Selling  Shareholders  and the Company  shall
have  performed  and  complied in all  material  respects  with all  agreements,
covenants and conditions required by this Agreement to be performed and complied
with by them, and the Selling  Shareholders  shall deliver a certificate to that
effect,  dated the  Closing  Date and  signed in the manner set forth in Section
9.1, "Representations and Warranties Accurate."

                         9.2.2 The  Selling  Shareholders  shall  deliver to the
Purchaser evidence that they have full right and title to, and rights to convey,
the Company  Shares and that there are no  outstanding  options on, rights to or
claims regarding the capital stock of the Company.

                                      -26-
<PAGE>
             9.3 LEGAL  PROHIBITION.  On the Closing Date,  there shall exist no
injunction or final judgment,  law or regulation prohibiting the consummation of
the transactions contemplated by this Agreement.

             9.4 TENDER OF ALL  OUTSTANDING  THE  COMPANY  SHARES.  The  Selling
Shareholders shall, pursuant to this Agreement, tender the Company Shares to the
Purchaser at the Closing in  transferrable  form  acceptable to the Purchaser in
accordance with Article 2, "Purchase and Sale."

             9.5  FINANCIAL  CONDITIONS.  The  review of the  Company  Financial
Statements shall not have revealed any matter which, in the reasonable  business
judgment of the Purchaser, makes the transactions contemplated by this Agreement
on the terms herein set forth inadvisable for the Purchaser.

                                   ARTICLE 10

 CONDITIONS PRECEDENT TO OBLIGATIONS OF THE SELLING SHAREHOLDERS AND THE COMPANY

             The obligations of the Selling  Shareholders  and the Company under
this Agreement shall be subject to the satisfaction,  on or prior to the Closing
Date, of all of the following conditions, any one or more of which may be waived
by the Selling Shareholders and the Company:

             10.1 REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES  ACCURATE.  All representations
and warranties of the Purchaser contained in this Agreement shall have been true
in all material respects when made, and also at and as of the Closing Date as if
such representations and warranties were made at and as of the Closing Date. The
Purchaser shall deliver to the Selling  Shareholders a certificate,  dated as of
the Closing Date and signed by an officer of the Purchaser, stating the above in
such form as the Selling Shareholders may reasonably request.  Acceptance of the
Company Shares by the Purchaser shall constitute an affirmation by the Purchaser
of the truth, as of the Closing Date, of the representations and warranties made
by the  Purchaser  in this  Agreement.  Any  Supplemental  Disclosure  Schedules
prepared by the Purchaser and delivered to the Selling  Shareholders  after June
26, 1998 shall be subject to review and  acceptance by the Selling  Shareholders
as of the Closing Date, in their sole discretion.

             10.2  REVERSE  STOCK  SPLIT AND  POST-CLOSING  CAPITALIZATION.  The
Purchaser shall effect a reverse split of its shares of Common Stock outstanding
immediately  prior to the  Closing  on a three  for two  basis so that for every
three shares a shareholder owns prior to the split, the shareholder

                                      -27-
<PAGE>
will  receive  two  shares.  Accordingly,  immediately  prior to the Closing the
Purchaser  will have 1,000,000 of Common Stock issued and  outstanding  and will
issue  9,000,000  shares of its Common Stock to the Selling  Shareholders at the
Closing.  Therefore,  the ownership of the  Purchaser's  issued and  outstanding
Common Stock immediately after the Closing will be as set forth in Schedule 10.2

             10.3  PERFORMANCE  BY  THE  PURCHASER.  The  Purchaser  shall  have
performed and complied in all material  respects with all agreements,  covenants
and  conditions  required by this Agreement to be performed and complied with by
it prior to or on the Closing Date,  and there shall be delivered to the Selling
Shareholders a certificate to that effect,  dated the Closing Date and signed in
the manner set forth in Section 10.1, "Representations and Warranties Accurate."

             10.4 LEGAL  PROHIBITION.  On the Closing Date, there shall exist no
injunction or final judgment,  law or regulation prohibiting the consummation of
the transactions contemplated by this Agreement.

             10.5 LEGAL  OPINION.  On the  Closing  Date,  the  Purchaser  shall
deliver an opinion to the Selling  Shareholders  from its legal  counsel in form
attached as Exhibit 10.4 hereto.

             10.6  ISSUANCE  OF  THE  PURCHASER  SHARES.  The  Purchaser  shall,
pursuant  to  this  Agreement,   issue  the  Purchaser  Shares  to  the  Selling
Shareholders at the Closing in accordance with Article 2, "Purchase and Sale."

             10.7 APPROVAL OF  SHAREHOLDERS.  The  shareholders of the Purchaser
shall  have  approved  the  transactions   contemplated  in  this  Agreement  in
accordance with Nevada law.

             10.8 FINANCIAL  CONDITIONS.  The review of the Purchaser  Financial
Statements shall not have revealed any matter which, in the reasonable  business
judgment of the Selling  Shareholders,  makes the  transactions  contemplated by
this  Agreement  on the terms  herein  set  forth  inadvisable  for the  Selling
Shareholders.

                                      -28-
<PAGE>
                                   ARTICLE 11

                                     CLOSING

             11.1 CLOSING DATE. The Closing Date shall be July 10, 1998, or such
later date as the Purchaser and Selling Shareholders may mutually select, but in
no event later than July 30, 1998.  No extension of the Closing Date beyond July
30,  1998 shall be made  unless  mutually  agreed  between  the  parties to this
Agreement.  Such agreement to extend the Closing Date shall be deemed sufficient
if executed by the Purchaser, the Selling Shareholders and the Company.

             11.2 DELIVERIES BY THE PURCHASER ON THE CLOSING DATE. The Purchaser
shall deliver to the Selling Shareholders at Closing:

                         11.2.1 The certificates  contemplated by Sections 10.1,
"Representations  and  Warranties  Accurate,"  and  10.2,  "Performance  by  the
Purchaser";

                         11.2.2   The  share   certificates   representing   the
Purchaser Shares; and

                         11.2.3 The  resignations  of the directors and officers
of the Purchaser  effective  immediately upon the Closing and appointment of the
new  directors  as  specified  in Article  14,  "Post-Closing  Covenants  by the
Purchaser."

             11.3  DELIVERIES BY THE SELLING  SHAREHOLDERS  ON THE CLOSING DATE.
The Selling Shareholders shall deliver to the Purchaser at Closing:

                         11.3.1 The  certificates  contemplated by Sections 9.1,
"Representations and Warranties  Accurate," and 9.2, "Performance by the Selling
Shareholders and the Company";

                         11.3.2 The  original  minute  book,  stock record book,
seal of the Company and all books and records of the Company; and

                         11.3.3 The share  certificates  representing all of the
Company Shares held by the Selling Shareholders, with attached stock powers duly
executed by the Selling Shareholders.

                                      -29-
<PAGE>
                                   ARTICLE 12

                                   TERMINATION

             12.1  TERMINATION  EVENTS.  This  Agreement may be  terminated  and
abandoned,  by notice given by the Purchaser, or by the Selling Shareholders and
the Company, as the case may be, in the manner hereinafter provided:

                         12.1.1  By  the  Purchaser,  if  without  fault  of the
Purchaser all of the conditions set forth in Article 9, "Conditions Precedent to
Obligations of the  Purchaser,"  shall not have been satisfied (or are incapable
of being  satisfied)  on or before the Closing  Date and have not been waived by
the Purchaser on or before such date;

                         12.1.2 By the Selling  Shareholders and the Company, if
without their fault all of the conditions  set forth in Article 10,  "Conditions
Precedent to Obligations of the Selling  Shareholders and the Company,"shall not
have been  satisfied  (or are  incapable  of being  satisfied)  on or before the
Closing  Date and  have not been  waived  by the  Selling  Shareholders  and the
Company on or before such Date;

                         12.1.3  By the  mutual  consent  and  agreement  of the
Purchaser, the Selling Shareholders and the Company; and

                         12.1.4  By  either  the  Purchaser  or by  the  Selling
Shareholders  and the  Company  if  after  completion  of their  respective  due
diligence of each other either the Purchaser or the Selling Shareholders and the
Company for any reason are not  satisfied  with the results of their  respective
due  diligence  investigations  of the other  party and give notice to the other
party to such effect.  The parties shall complete their respective due diligence
investigations on or before the Closing Date and if the Selling Shareholders and
the Company or the Purchaser fail to give such notice on or before the foregoing
date,  they shall be deemed to be satisfied with their  respective due diligence
examinations for purposes of this Paragraph 12.1.4.

             12.2  RELATIONSHIPS  WITH THIRD PARTIES.  In  consideration  of the
undertaking  by the  parties  of the  substantial  legal,  accounting  and other
expenses  incident to their entering into this  Agreement and proceeding  toward
the Closing, the parties agree that until the Closing Date or upon

                                      -30-
<PAGE>
earlier  termination of this  Agreement,  they will not enter into or pursue any
arrangements or negotiations with any other party relative to the sale or merger
of the Company  into any other party or any sale of assets for control  relative
to any  extraordinary  transaction  involving the Company without the consent of
the Purchaser.

             12.3  EFFECT  OF  TERMINATION.  If  this  Agreement  is  terminated
pursuant to Section 12.1,  "Termination  Events," this Agreement shall forthwith
become void,  and there shall be no liability or continuing  obligations  on the
part of the parties hereunder.

                                   ARTICLE 13

                                 INDEMNIFICATION

             13.1 SURVIVAL OF REPRESENTATIONS, WARRANTIES AND CERTAIN COVENANTS.
The  representations and warranties made by the parties in this Agreement and in
the  certificates  delivered  at the  Closing,  and all of the  covenants of the
parties in this  Agreement,  shall  survive the  execution  and delivery of this
Agreement and the Closing Date and (except for those  contained in Sections 3.6,
4.3,  4.5,  4.15  and  7.1  and  any  substantially  identical  representations,
warranties  and covenants  effectively  made in Article 5 or in any  certificate
delivered at the Closing)  shall  expire on the last day of the  thirtieth  full
calendar month following the Closing Date. Any claim for indemnification  (other
than a claim based upon Sections  3.6, 4.3 or 4.5,  which can be asserted at any
time,  or based  upon  Section  4.15,  which can be  asserted  within  the limit
provided  therein,  or based on Section 7.1,  which can be asserted prior to the
last day of the thirtieth full calendar month  following the Closing Date) shall
be  effective  only if  notice  of such  claim is given  by the  party  claiming
indemnification  or other relief to the party against whom such  indemnification
or other relief is claimed before said expiration date.

             13.2 INDEMNIFICATION BY THE PURCHASER AND HOFER.

                         13.2.1 The  Purchaser  and Hofer agree to indemnify and
hold the Selling Shareholders harmless, from and after the Closing Date, against
and in respect of all  matters in  connection  with any losses,  liabilities  or
damages  (including   reasonable   attorneys'  fees)  incurred  by  the  Selling
Shareholders that result from any  misrepresentation or breach of the warranties
by  the  Purchaser  in  Article  3,   "Representations  and  Warranties  of  the
Purchaser,"or  any breach or  nonfulfillment of any agreement or covenant on the
part of the Purchaser contained in this Agreement, and all suits, actions,

                                      -31-
<PAGE>
proceedings,  demands,  judgments,  costs and expenses incident to the foregoing
matters, including reasonable attorneys' fees.

                         13.2.2 In no event shall  liability of the Purchaser or
Hofer under  Section  13.2.1 above to the Selling  Shareholders  (other than for
costs and reasonable  attorneys'  fees incurred by such Selling  Shareholders to
which they may be entitled  pursuant to Section 13.5,  "Arbitration," or Section
15.2.3)(i)  exceed the total  value of the Company  Shares  which have been (and
will,  pursuant to the formula of Article 2 hereof, be required to be) delivered
to the  Purchaser,  which value shall be deemed to be $7,000,000 for purposes of
this Paragraph  13.2.2.  or (ii) exceed,  in the case of Hofer,  $750,000 if the
loss,  liability or damage  arises from a matter  addressed in the legal opinion
attached as Exhibit 10.4 hereto.  Further,  Hofer shall have no liability  under
Paragraph  13.2.1  above to the  Selling  Shareholders  for the  failure  of the
Purchaser to satisfy any post-closing covenant.

                         13.2.3  Notwithstanding  the  provisions  of  Paragraph
13.2.1 above, the Selling Shareholders shall be entitled to seek indemnification
from the Purchaser pursuant to Paragraph 13.2.1 of this Section 13.2 only to the
extent  that  the  aggregate  of the  losses,  liabilities,  costs  and  damages
(including  reasonable  attorneys'  fees)  incurred by the Selling  Shareholders
which they  would be  entitled  to claim  under such  Paragraph  13.2.1  exceeds
$25,000.

             13.3 INDEMNIFICATION BY THE SELLING SHAREHOLDERS.

                         13.3.1 The Selling  Shareholders,  on a joint and not a
several  basis,  agree to indemnify  and hold the Purchaser  harmless,  from and
after the Closing Date, against and in respect of all matters in connection with
any losses, liabilities, costs or damages (including reasonable attorneys' fees)
incurred by the Purchaser  resulting from (i) any breach of its  representations
and warranties in Section 4.3,  "Title,"or (ii) any breach or  nonfulfillment of
their   covenants  in  Article  7,   "Post-Closing   Covenants  By  the  Selling
Shareholders."

                         13.3.2 The Selling  Shareholders,  on a joint and not a
several  basis,  agree to indemnify  and hold the Purchaser  harmless,  from and
after the Closing Date, against and in respect of all matters in connection with
any  losses,  liabilities  or damages  (including  reasonable  attorneys'  fees)
incurred by the Purchaser resulting from any  misrepresentation or breach of its
warranties   in  Article  4,   "Representations   and   Warranties   of  Selling
Shareholders," Article 5, "Representations and Warranties

                                      -32-
<PAGE>
of the Company," or Article 8,  "Securities  Laws," (other than Section 4.3), or
any breach or nonful  fillment of any  agreement  or covenant on the part of the
Selling Shareholders contained in this Agreement (other than those in Article 7,
"Post-Closing  Covenants By the Selling  Shareholders") and all suits,  actions,
proceedings,  demands,  judgments,  costs and expenses incident to the foregoing
matters,  including reasonable  attorneys' fees. In addition,  in the event that
any matter covered by  indemnification is clearly also covered by insurance held
by the Company, the Purchaser shall cause the Company to make reasonable efforts
to recover on such insurance in mitigation of its indemnification claim.

                         13.3.3  Notwithstanding  the  provisions  of  Paragraph
13.3.2 above, the Purchaser shall be entitled to seek  indemnification  from the
Selling Shareholders  pursuant to Para graph 13.3.2 of this Section 13.3 only to
the extent  that the  aggregate  of the losses,  liabilities,  costs and damages
(including  reasonable attorneys' fees) incurred by the Purchaser which it would
be entitled to claim under such Paragraph  13.3.2 exceeds  $25,000.  In no event
shall the  liability  of the Selling  Shareholders  under  Paragraph  13.3.1 and
13.3.2 above to the Purchaser  (other than for costs and  reasonable  attorneys'
fees incurred by the  Purchaser to which the Purchaser may be entitled  pursuant
to Section 13.5, "Arbitration"or Section 15.2.3) exceed $750,000 in aggregate to
the Selling Shareholders.

             13.4   INDEMNIFICATION  BY  THE  COMPANY.  The  Company  agrees  to
indemnify  and hold the  Purchaser  harmless,  from and after the Closing  Date,
against and in respect of all matters in connection with any losses, liabilities
or damages  (including  reasonable  attorneys'  fees)  incurred by the Purchaser
resulting from any  misrepresentation  or breach of its warranties in Article 5,
and all suits,  actions,  proceedings,  demands,  judgments,  costs and expenses
incident  to  the  foregoing  matters,  including  reasonable  attorneys'  fees;
provided,  however,  that the  Purchaser  shall not be  entitled to make a claim
against  the  Company  (i) to the extent  that such claim  could not be asserted
against the Selling Shareholders because excluded from indemnification under the
provisions  in  Paragraph  13.3.2  or (ii) if  resolved  against  the  Purchaser
pursuant to the procedures provided in Section 13.5,  "Arbitration."  Subject to
the  foregoing,   the  liability  of  the  Company  hereunder  is  separate  and
independent of any liability of the Selling  Shareholders.  Nothing herein shall
require the Purchaser to assert its  indemnification  rights against the Company
prior to asserting its indemnification  rights against the Selling Shareholders,
and either or both rights may be pursued by the Purchaser independently, in such
priority as the Purchaser may in its discretion decide, or jointly. No agreement
between the Purchaser

                                      -33-
<PAGE>
and the  Company  shall be  binding  upon or have any  evidentiary  value in any
dispute between the Purchaser and the Selling Shareholders.

             13.5  ARBITRATION.  If the  Purchaser  believes  that a matter  has
occurred   that   entitles   it   to   indemnification   under   Section   13.3,
"Indemnification by the Selling Shareholders," or Section 13.4, "Indemnification
by the Company,"or the Selling  Shareholders  believe that a matter has occurred
that entitles them to indemnification  under Section 13.2,  "Indemnification  by
the Purchaser," it (the  "Indemnified  Party") shall give notice to the party or
parties against whom  indemnification is sought (each, an "Indemnifying  Party")
describing such matter in reasonable  detail.  The  Indemnifying  Party shall be
entitled to give such  notice  prior to the  establishment  of the amount of its
losses, liabilities,  costs or damages, and to supplement its claim from time to
time thereafter by further  notices as they are  established.  The  Indemnifying
Party shall  respond to such claim for  indemnification  within thirty (30) days
after  receipt  of  the  claim  stating  its  acceptance  or  objection  to  the
indemnification  claim,  and  explaining  its  position  in  respect  thereto in
reasonable  detail.  If such Indemnifying  Party does not timely so respond,  it
will be deemed to have accepted the Indemnified Party's indemnification claim as
specified  in the notice given by the  Indemnified  Party.  If the  Indemnifying
Party gives a timely objection  notice,  then the parties will negotiate in good
faith  to  attempt  to  resolve  the  dispute,  and upon  the  expiration  of an
additional  thirty  (30) day period  from the  objection  notice or such  longer
period as to which the Indemnified and Indemnifying  Parties may agree, any such
dispute may be submitted to arbitration  in Santa Clara County,  California to a
member  of  the  American  Arbitration  Association  mutually  appointed  by the
Indemnified  and  Indemnifying  Parties  (or, in the event the  Indemnified  and
Indemnifying  Parties cannot agree on a single such member,  to a panel of three
(3) members of such  Association  selected in accordance  with the rules of such
Association),  who may promptly  arbitrate  such dispute in accordance  with the
rules of such  Association  and report to the parties upon such disputed  items,
and such report shall be final, binding and conclusive on the parties.  Judgment
upon  .the  award  by the  arbitrator(s)  may be  entered  in any  court  having
jurisdiction.  The prevailing party in any such arbitration shall be entitled to
recover  from,   and  have  paid  by,  the  other  party  hereto  all  fees  and
disbursements of such arbitrator or arbitrators. For this purpose, a party shall
be deemed to be the prevailing  party only if such party would be deemed to be a
prevailing party under Section 15.2.3.

             13.6  NO  FINDERS.  Except  as set  forth  in  Schedule  13.6,  the
Purchaser represents and warrants to the Selling  Shareholders,  and the Selling
Shareholders  represent and warrant to the  Purchaser,  respectively,  that they
have not become obligated to pay any fee or commission to any

                                      -34-
<PAGE>
broker,   finder  or  intermediary   for  or  on  account  of  the  transactions
contemplated by this Agreement.  The Purchaser  agrees to indemnify and hold the
Selling Shareholders harmless from any breach of the Purchaser's  representation
in the previous  sentence,  and the Selling  Shareholders agree to indemnify and
hold the  Purchaser  harmless  from any  breach of their  representation  in the
previous sentence.

             13.7 THIRD PERSON  CLAIM  PROCEDURES.  If a third person  asserts a
claim  against  a  party  to  this  Agreement,   and  it  is  intended  to  seek
indemnification  against  another  party or parties (the  "Indemnifying  Party")
under the provisions of this Article 13 in connection  with the matter  involved
in  such  claim,  the  party  intending  to  seek  such   indemnification   (the
"Indemnified  Party") shall  promptly,  but in no event later than ten (10) days
prior to the time at which an answer or other responsive pleading or notice with
respect to the claim is required,  notify the Indemnifying  Party of such claim.
The  Indemnifying  Party  shall have the right at its  election to take over the
defense or settlement  of such claim by giving prompt notice to the  Indemnified
Party that it will do so, such election to be made and notice given in any event
at least 24 hours  prior  to the  time at which an  answer  or other  responsive
pleading or notice with respect thereto is required.  If the Indemnifying  Party
makes such election, it may conduct the defense of such claim through counsel of
its  choosing  (subject  to  the  Indemnified   Party's  approval,   not  to  be
unreasonably  withheld),  will be responsible  for the expenses of such defense,
and shall be bound by the results of its defense or  settlement  of the claim to
the extent it produces damage or loss to the Indemnified Party. The Indemnifying
Party shall not settle such claims without prior notice to and consultation with
the  Indemnified  Party,  and no such  settlement  involving  any  injunction or
material and adverse  effect on the  Indemnified  Party may be agreed to without
its consent. So long as the Indemnifying Party is diligently contesting any such
claim in good  faith,  the  Indemnified  Party  shall not pay or settle any such
claim.  If the  Indemnifying  Party does not make such election,  or having made
such election does not proceed diligently to defend such claim prior to the time
at which an answer or other  responsive  pleading or notice with respect thereto
is required,  or does not continue  diligently  to contest such claim,  then the
Indemnified  Party may take over defense and proceed to handle such claim in its
exclusive  discretion,  and the Indemnifying Party shall be bound by any defense
or settlement that the Indemnified  Party may make in good faith with respect to
such claim. The parties agree to cooperate in defending such third party claims,
and the defending party shall have access to records,  information and personnel
in control of the other part which are  pertinent  to the defense  thereof.  The
Purchaser,  the Company,  the Selling  Shareholders and Hofer do not know of any
such third party or any pending or threatened third party claim.

                                      -35-
<PAGE>
             13.8 LIMITATION OF REMEDIES.

                         13.8.1  Except as provided in Paragraph  13.8.2 of this
Section 13.8, if the parties choose to arbitrate,  the parties  understand  that
this  requires  that all disputed  claims will be submitted  to  arbitration  in
accordance  with Section  13.5,  "Arbitration."  In such case,  no party to this
Agreement  shall be liable to any other  party or parties  or have any  remedies
against  any other  party or parties  under this  Agreement  other than  through
arbitration  as  provided  in this  Article  13. If the  parties  choose  not to
arbitrate  under  Section 13.5,  "Arbitration,"  except as provided in Paragraph
13.8.2 of this Section 13.8, they may pursue any remedy at law or equity.

                         13.8.2  Notwithstanding  the  provisions  of  Paragraph
13.8.1 of this  Section  13.8,  the  Purchaser  shall,  in addition to rights to
indemnification  provided in this  Article  13, be  entitled  to such  equitable
remedies for any breach of Article 7 of this  Agreement as are  available  under
applicable law. Such remedies shall not be subject to  arbitration,  except that
if the Purchaser  elects to submit any dispute over a claim for equitable relief
to arbitration in accordance with California law, such dispute will be submitted
for and decided by arbitration.  In such event,  arbitrators  shall be chosen in
the manner set forth in Section 13.5, "Arbitration."

                                   ARTICLE 14

                     POST-CLOSING COVENANTS BY THE PURCHASER

             With respect to its  post-Closing  operation  of the  Company,  the
Purchaser covenants to and agrees with the Selling Shareholders as follows:

             14.1 ELECTION OF DIRECTORS OF THE PURCHASER.  The Purchaser and its
directors shall nominate and vote for the election Theodore S. Li, Betty Li, Hui
Lee and Jey Hsin Yao as  directors of the  Purchaser  and shall not vote for the
removal of, and vote for the reappointment through the 1999 Fiscal Year of, such
individuals  as directors.  Accordingly,  after the Closing the directors of the
Purchaser will be Theodore S. Li, Betty Li, Hui Lee and Jey Hsin Yao.

             14.2  ELECTION OF DIRECTORS OF THE COMPANY.  The  Purchaser and its
directors  shall nominate and vote for the election of Theodore S. Li, Betty Li,
Hui Lee and Jey Hsin Yao as  directors of the Company and shall not vote for the
removal of, and vote for the reappointment through the 1999

                                      -36-
<PAGE>
Fiscal Year, of such  individuals as directors.  Accordingly,  after the Closing
the  directors  of the Company will be Theodore S. Li, Betty Li, Hui Lee and Jey
Hsin Yao.

             14.3 LISTING IN STANDARD & POOR'S CORPORATE REPORTS.  The Purchaser
shall use its best  efforts  in  listing  the  Purchaser  in  Standard  & Poor's
Corporate  Reports  "(Standard & Poor") and qualify its Common Stock for trading
in the states listed in Schedule 14.3 through the listing of the Company through
Standard & Poor's.

             14.4  CONSULTING  SERVICES.  Hofer  will  use his best  efforts  to
introduce  the Purchaser to an investment  banking  relationship  and advise and
assist the Company in connection with a secondary  public offering of its equity
securities.

                                   ARTICLE 15

                                  MISCELLANEOUS

             15.1 ACCESS AND INFORMATION.

                         15.1.1 The Company and the  Purchaser  shall provide to
each other and their respective counsel,  accountants and other  representatives
reasonable access upon reasonable notice during normal business hours during the
period  between the date hereof and the Closing Date, to all of the  properties,
books, records,  contracts and commitments of each other, and shall furnish, or,
authorize their respective counsel and accountants to furnish,  to the Purchaser
or the Company,  as the case may be, and their  respective  representatives  all
such  information  as the parties  may  reasonably  request of each  other.  The
Purchaser  hereby has the  permission  of the  Company  to contact  and carry on
discussions with the customers,  prospective customers, suppliers, employees and
all persons and entities under contract with the Company upon reasonable notice.
Both the Purchaser and the Company and Selling  Shareholders will cooperate with
all reasonable  requests by the other party for  information and shall use their
best efforts to secure the  cooperation  of third  parties who may be reasonably
requested to furnish such information to each other.

                         15.1.2 The  Purchaser  and the  Company and the Selling
Shareholders  shall keep all  Confidential  Information  derived  from the other
party relating to their respective  businesses  confidential pending the Closing
of the transaction contemplated by this Agreement. The Purchaser and

                                      -37-
<PAGE>
Selling  Shareholders  shall, and the Purchaser and Selling  Shareholders  shall
cause their respective officers,  directors, agents and representatives to, keep
all  Confidential  Information  derived  from the other  party  relating  to the
business of the Purchaser and the Company  confidential  until the  Confidential
Information is made public by the party owning or controlling  the  Confidential
Information or the Confidential Information otherwise becomes publicly known.

                         15.1.3 If this Agreement should be terminated  pursuant
to Article 12, the Purchaser and the Selling  Shareholders shall return all such
Confidential Information which they have received from the other party and shall
not  disclose  or use such  information  in any  manner,  except  to the  extent
required  to so  disclose  the same by law and  except for  information  already
publicly available.

             15.2 EXPENSES.

                         15.2.1 The Purchaser  shall be solely  responsible  for
paying its own expenses and costs incident to the  preparation of this Agreement
and to the consummation of the transactions  contemplated by this Agreement, and
shall have no obligation for paying such expenses or costs of the other parties.

                         15.2.2  The  Company  shall be solely  responsible  for
paying  its own  expenses  and  costs,  and those of the  Selling  Shareholders,
incident to the  preparation  of this Agreement and to the  consummation  of the
transactions contemplated by this Agreement. The Selling Shareholders shall have
no obligation to reimburse the expenses or costs of the Purchaser.

                         15.2.3  Notwithstanding  any  of the  other  provisions
hereof,  in the event of  arbitration  and/or  litigation  with  respect  to the
interpretation  or enforcement of this Agreement or any provisions  hereof,  the
prevailing  party in any such matter shall be entitled to recover from the other
party his or its reasonable costs and expense,  including reasonable  attorneys'
fees,  incurred in such  arbitration  and/or  litigation.  For  purposes of this
Paragraph  15.2.3,  a party shall be deemed to be the  prevailing  party only if
such party (A)(i)  receives an award or judgment in such  arbitration or (ii) is
ordered to pay the other party or (B)(i)  succeeds in having  imposed a material
equitable  remedy on the other party (such as an injunction or order  compelling
specific  performance),  or (ii) succeeds in defeating the other party's request
for such an equitable remedy.

                                      -38-
<PAGE>
             15.3 ASSIGNMENT. The rights and obligations of any party under this
Agreement may not be assigned or transferred  without the prior written  consent
of the Purchaser or the Selling Shareholders, as the case may be. Any assignment
in violation of this paragraph shall be void.

             15.4 CHOICE OF LAWS.  This Agreement  shall be governed,  construed
and enforced in accordance with the laws of the State of California.

             15.5  JURISDICTION;  AGENTS FOR  SERVICE OF PROCESS.  Any  judicial
proceeding  brought  against any of the parties to this Agreement on any dispute
arising out of this Agreement or any matter related hereto brought in the courts
of the State of California,  Santa Clara County,  or in the  appropriate  United
States  District  Court for such County and, by  execution  and  delivery of the
Agreement,  each of the parties to this Agreement  accepts for himself or itself
the exclusive jurisdiction of the aforesaid courts, and irrevocably agrees to be
bound by any judgment rendered thereby in connection with this Agreement.

             15.6   CAPTIONS.   Captions  and  headings   used  herein  are  for
convenience  only and  shall  not be used in  construing  or  interpreting  this
Agreement.

             15.7 GENDER AND NUMBER.  Whenever the context of this  Agreement so
requires,  the  masculine  gender  includes the  feminine or neuter,  the neuter
includes the masculine or feminine, and the singular number includes the plural.

             15.8  SEVERABILITY.  Each  provision  hereof is severable from this
Agreement,  and if one or more  provisions  hereof  are  declared  invalid,  the
remaining  provisions  shall  nevertheless  remain in full force and effect.  If
Section 7.1, "Resale of Purchaser Shares," is declared  excessively broad, as to
time, area or otherwise,  it shall be construed as limited to the broadest time,
area or other scope permitted by applicable law.

             15.9 NO THIRD-PARTY  BENEFICIARIES.  Each of the provisions of this
Agreement  is for  the  sole  and  exclusive  benefit  of the  parties  thereto,
respectively, as their interests appear, and shall not be deemed for the benefit
of any other person.

                                      -39-
<PAGE>
             15.10  AMENDMENT.  This Agreement may be amended only by the mutual
written  agreement of the Purchaser,  the Selling  Shareholders and the Company.
Any such written amendment executed as set forth in the preceding sentence shall
be binding upon all parties  hereto.  The failure of any party to enforce at any
time any of the provisions of this Agreement  shall in no way be deemed a waiver
of any such  provision,  nor in any way affect the validity of this Agreement or
any part thereof.

             15.11   SUCCESSORS   AND   ASSIGNS.   Subject  to   Section   15.3,
"Assignment,"  this Agreement  shall be binding upon and inure to the benefit of
the successors and assigns and heirs of the parties hereto.

             15.12  COUNTERPARTS.  This Agreement may be executed in two or more
counterparts, and by the different parties hereto on separate counterparts, each
of which shall be deemed an original, but all of which together shall constitute
one and the same instrument.

             15.13 ENTIRE AGREEMENT. This Agreement and its Schedules constitute
the entire  contract among the parties hereto with respect to the subject matter
thereof,  superseding all prior  communications  and  discussions,  and no party
hereto shall be bound by any  communication  on the subject matter hereof unless
such is in  writing  signed  by any  necessary  party  thereto  and bears a date
subsequent  to the date hereof.  The exhibits and  schedules  shall be construed
with and deemed as an integral  part of this  Agreement to the same extent as if
the same had  been set  forth  verbatim  herein.  Information  set  forth in any
exhibit, schedule or provision of this Agreement shall be deemed to be set forth
in every other  exhibit,  schedule or provision of this  Agreement and therefore
shall be deemed to be disclosed for all purposes of this Agreement.

             15.14 PUBLIC ANNOUNCEMENTS. Through the Closing Date no party shall
issue any press release or public announcement in connection with this Agreement
or the  transactions  contemplated  hereby  without  prior notice to and written
consent of the other party.

             15.15  FURTHER  ASSURANCES.  Each of the parties  hereto  shall use
commercially  practicable  efforts to fulfill all of the conditions set forth in
this Agreement over which it has control or influence  (including  obtaining any
consents  necessary for the performance of such party'S  obligations  hereunder)
and to consummate the transactions  contemplated  hereby,  and shall execute and
deliver such further  instruments and provide such documents as are necessary to
effect this Agreement.

                                      -40-
<PAGE>
             15.16  NOTICES.  All  notices or other  communications  required or
permitted  hereunder shall be in writing and shall be validly given if delivered
personally,  or if delivered by courier,  or if delivered by telex or telecopier
with receipt  confirmed,  or if sent by certified or registered  air mail return
receipt requested, addressed, if to the Purchaser to:

                                Wildfire Capital Corporation
                                Gainey Ranch Corporate Center
                                8800 North Gainey Center Drive
                                Suite 256
                                Scottsdale, Arizona  85258

             with a copy to:    Gary R. Henrie, Esq.
                                Lehman, Jensen & Donahue, L.C.
                                620 Judge Building
                                8 East Broadway
                                Salt Lake City, Utah 84111-2204

or to such other person or at such other place as the Purchaser shall furnish to
the Selling  Shareholders  in writing;  if to the  Selling  Shareholders  or the
Company to them at:

                                Pacific Magtron, Inc.
                                Attn:  Theodore S. Li
                                1600 California Circle
                                Milpitas, California  94035

             with a copy to:    Christian J. Hoffmann, III, Esq.
                                Streich Lang, P.A.
                                Renaissance One
                                Two North Central Avenue
                                Phoenix, Arizona  85004

or to such other person or at such other place as the Selling Shareholders shall
furnish  the  Purchaser  in  writing.  Notice  given  by telex  shall be  deemed
delivered  when  received as evidenced  by their  answer  back.  Notice given by
telecopier  shall be deemed  delivered  when  receipt  thereof is  confirmed  by
subsequent  telephone call.  Notice given by certified or registered air mail as
set out above shall be deemed  delivered at the earlier of (i) actual receipt as
evidenced by the return receipts,  or (ii) five (5) business days after the date
the same is  postmarked  (if  postmarked in the United States and addressed to a
recipient in the United  States) or seven (7)  business  days after the date the
same is postmarked  (if  postmarked  outside the United States or addressed to a
recipient outside the United States).

                                      -41-
<PAGE>
             IN WITNESS  WHEREOF,  the parties have duly executed this Agreement
as of the day and year first above written.

                                            SELLING SHAREHOLDERS:

                                            /s/ Theodore S. Li
                                            ------------------------------------
                                            THEODORE S. LI

                                            /s/ Hui Lee
                                            ------------------------------------
                                            HUI LEE


                                            COMPANY:

                                            PACIFIC MAGTRON, INC.,
                                            a California corporation

                                            By /s/ Theodore S. Li
                                              ----------------------------------
                                                Theodore S. Li
                                                Its President

                                            PURCHASER:

                                            WILDFIRE CAPITAL CORPORATION,
                                            a Nevada corporation

                                            By /s/ Tom Hofer
                                              ----------------------------------
                                                Tom Hofer
                                                Its President


                                            AS TO SECTIONS 3.17.2.3 AND 13.2 AND
                                            ARTICLE 14 ABOVE:

                                            /s/ Thomas Hofer
                                            ------------------------------------
                                            Thomas Hofer

                                      -42-

                 AMENDED AND RESTATED ARTICLES OF INCORPORATION
                                       OF
                       PACIFIC MAGTRON INTERNATIONAL CORP.

         Pursuant  to the  provisions  of Section  78.403 of the Nevada  Revised
Statutes, the undersigned  corporation adopts the following Amended and Restated
Articles of Incorporation as of this date:

         FIRST:  The name of the  corporation is Pacific  Magtron  International
Corp.

         SECOND:  The corporation was originally  incorporated under the name of
Wildfire Capital  Corporation and the original  Articles of Incorporation of the
corporation were filed by the Secretary of State on January 8, 1996.

         We the  undersigned  Theodore  S.  Li and Hui  Lee of  Pacific  Magtron
International  Corp.  do  hereby  certify  that the Board of  Directors  of said
corporation  at a meeting  duly  convened,  held on the 16th day of July,  1998,
adopted a  resolution  to amend  and  restate  the  original  articles  in their
entirety as follows:

         1. NAME. The name of the Corporation is:

                       PACIFIC MAGTRON INTERNATIONAL CORP.

         2. STATUTORY PLACE OF BUSINESS.  The statutory place of business of the
Corporation  in the State of Nevada is located at 7604  Delaware Bay Drive,  Las
Vegas, Nevada 89128.

         3. STATUTORY  AGENT.  The name and address of its resident agent is the
Corporation Trust Company of Nevada, One East First Street, Reno, Nevada 89501.

         4. PURPOSE.  The purpose for which the  Corporation is organized is the
transaction  of any and all  lawful  activities  for which  corporations  may be
incorporated  under the laws of the State of Nevada,  as the same may be amended
from time to time.

         5. CAPITAL STOCK.  The aggregate number of shares of capital stock that
the  Corporation  shall be  authorized to issue is Thirty  Million  (30,000,000)
shares which shall consist of the following:

                  (a)  COMMON  STOCK.   The  authorized   common  stock  of  the
Corporation  shall be Twenty-Five  Million  (25,000,000)  shares of Common Stock
with a par value of $.001 per share.  The  holders of the Common  Stock shall be
entitled  to one vote for each  share held by them of record on the books of the
Corporation.  Such shares of Common Stock may be issued by the corporation  from
time to time for such consideration greater than or equal to par value as may be
fixed  from  time  to time by the  Board  of  Directors.  The  designations  and
preferences of the Common Stock are as follows:

                           (1)  Dividends;  Distributions.  Each share of Common
Stock shall be  entitled to receive  dividends  and other  distribution  paid in
cash,  securities,  property or otherwise,  when and if declared by the board of
the Corporation.

                                       -1-
<PAGE>
                           (2)  Liquidation.  In the  event of any  liquidation,
dissolution,  or winding up of the affairs of the  Corporation,  voluntarily  or
involuntarily,  the  holders  of shares of Common  Stock  shall be  entitled  to
receive out of any remaining  assets of the  corporation  legally  available for
distribution  which  shall be  distributed  pro rata among the holders of Common
Stock in  proportion  to the  number  of shares  of  Common  Stock  held by such
holders.

                  (b) SERIAL PREFERRED STOCK. The authorized  preferred stock of
the Corporation  shall be Five Million  (5,000,000)  shares of serial  preferred
stock with a par value of $.001 per share.  Subject to the terms and  provisions
of this Article 5, the Board of Directors of the  Corporation  is  authorized to
provide, from time to time, for the issuance of shares of serial preferred stock
in  series  and to fix  from  time  to time  before  issuance  the  designation,
preferences, privileges and voting powers of the shares of each series of serial
preferred  stock and the  restrictions  or  qualifications  thereof,  including,
without limiting the generality of the foregoing, the following:

                           (1) The serial  designation and authorized  number of
shares;

                           (2) The  dividend  rate,  the  date or dates on which
such  dividends  will be payable and the extent to which such  dividends  may be
cumulative;

                           (3) The  amount  or  amounts  to be  received  by the
holders in the event of voluntary or  involuntary  dissolution or liquidation of
the Corporation;

                           (4) The voting  rights,  if any, of the holders;  (5)
The price or prices at which  shares may be redeemed  and any terms,  conditions
and limitations upon such redemption;

                           (6) Any sinking fund  provisions  for  redemption  or
purchase of shares of such series; and

                           (7) The terms and conditions, if any, on which shares
may be converted at the election of holders thereof into shares or other capital
stock, or of other series of serial preferred stock of the Corporation.

         Each series of serial  preferred  stock,  in  preference  to the Common
Stock,  will be  entitled  to  dividends  from  funds  or other  assets  legally
available therefor,  at such rates,  payable at such times and cumulative to the
extent as may be fixed by the Board of Directors of the Corporation  pursuant to
the  authority  herein  conferred  upon  it.  In the  event  of  dissolution  or
liquidation of the Corporation,  voluntary or involuntary, the holders of serial
preferred stock, in preference to the Common Stock,  will be entitled to receive
such  amount  or  amounts  as may be fixed  by the  Board  of  Directors  of the
Corporation pursuant to the authority herein conferred upon it. Preference stock
of any series redeemed, converted, exchanged, purchased or otherwise acquired by
the Corporation  shall be canceled by the Corporation and returned to the status
of authorized but unissued  preference stock. All shares of any series of serial
preferred stock, as between

                                       -2-
<PAGE>
themselves,  shall  rank  equally  and be  identical;  and all  series of serial
preferred  stock,  as between  themselves,  shall rank  equally and be identical
except as set forth in  resolutions  of the Board of Directors  authorizing  the
issuance of the series.

         6. GOVERNING  BOARD.  The governing board of the  Corporation  shall be
known as  directors,  and the  number  of  directors  may  from  time to time be
increased or decreased in such manner as shall be provided by the Bylaws of this
corporation,  providing  that the  number of  directors  shall not be reduced to
fewer than one (1). The names and  addresses of the first Board of Directors are
as follows:

         NAME                             POST OFFICE ADDRESS
         ----                             -------------------

         Stanley K. Stilwell              7604 Delaware Bay Drive
                                          Las Vegas, Nevada 89128

         7.  PAYMENT  FOR  STOCK.  The  capital  stock,  after the amount of the
subscription  price or par  value  has been paid in,  shall  not be  subject  to
assessment to pay the debts of the corporation.

         8.  INCORPORATOR.  The name and post office address of the incorporator
signing the Articles of Incorporation is as follows:

         NAME                             POST OFFICE ADDRESS
         ----                             -------------------

         Stanley K. Stilwell              7604 Delaware Bay Drive
                                          Las Vegas, Nevada 89128

         9. PERPETUAL EXISTENCE. The Corporation is to have perpetual existence.

         10. AMENDMENT, ALTERATION OR CHANGE OF THESE ARTICLES OF INCORPORATION.
The  Corporation  reserves  the right to  amend,  alter,  change  or repeal  any
provision  contained  in the  Articles  of  Incorporation,  in the manner now or
hereafter prescribed by statute, or by Articles of Incorporation, and all rights
conferred upon stockholders herein are granted subject to this reservation.

         11.  MEETINGS OF  STOCKHOLDERS.  Meetings of  stockholders  may be held
within or without the State of Nevada,  as the Bylaws may provide.  The books of
the corporation may be kept (subject to any provision contained in the statutes)
outside  the State of Nevada at such place or places as may be  designated  from
time to time by the Board of Directors or in the Bylaws of the corporation.

         12.  ELIMINATION OF DIRECTOR  LIABILITY.  No director or officer of the
corporation  shall be personally  liable to the corporation or its  stockholders
for  monetary  damages  for breach of  fiduciary  duty as a director or officer;
provided,  however,  that nothing  contained herein shall eliminate or limit the
liability of a director or officer of the corporation to the fullest extent

                                      -3-
<PAGE>
provided by applicable laws (i) for acts or omissions which involve  intentional
misconduct,  fraud  or  knowing  violation  of law or (ii) for  authorizing  the
payment of dividends in violation of NRS 78.300, as amended, or any successor to
such section. The limitation of liability provided herein shall continue after a
director or officer has ceased to occupy such  position as to acts or  omissions
occurring during such director's or officer's term or terms of office.

         13. INDEMNIFICATION. To the fullest extent permitted by Nevada law, the
Corporation  shall  indemnify  and pay the  expenses of any person who is or was
made,  or  threatened  to be made, a party to an action or  proceeding  (whether
civil,  criminal,  administrative  or  investigative) by reason of the fact that
such person is or was a director,  officer, employee, trustee or agent of or for
the  Corporation  or is or was serving at the request or with the prior approval
of the Corporation as a director, officer, employee, trustee or agent of another
corporation,  trust or enterprise,  against any liability  asserted against such
person and incurred by such person in any  capacity  arising out of that persons
status as such, whether or not the Corporation would have the power to indemnify
that person  against such  liability  under the  provisions of the Bylaws of the
Corporation.  Further,  the Corporation will pay the expenses of such persons as
they  are  incurred  in  advance  of the  final  disposition  of the  action  or
proceeding, upon the receipt of an undertaking by or on behalf of such person to
repay  the  amount  if it is  ultimately  determined  by a  court  of  competent
jurisdiction  that  such  person  is  not  entitled  to be  indemnified  by  the
Corporation.

         14. ACQUISITION OF CONTROLLING INTEREST.  The Corporation elects not to
be governed by NRS 78.378,  ET SEQ. - Acquisition  of Controlling  Interest,  as
amended,   and  NRS  78.411  to  78.444,   inclusive,   dealing  with   business
combinations, as amended, and any successors to any of such sections.

         The number of shares of the  corporation  outstanding  and  entitled to
vote on an amendment to the Articles of  Incorporation  is  1,500,000;  that the
said  change(s) and amendment  have been consented to and approved by a majority
vote of the  stockholders  holding  at least a  majority  of each class of stock
outstanding and entitled to vote thereon.

                                       -4-
<PAGE>
         THEODORE S. LI is the President of PACIFIC MAGTRON  INTERNATIONAL CORP.
and that HUI LEE is the  Secretary  of the  corporation;  that  they  have  been
authorized  to execute the foregoing  certificate  by resolution of the Board of
Directors,  adopted  at a meeting  of the  Directors  duly  called and that such
meeting  was  held  on the  16th  day of  July,  1998  and  that  the  foregoing
certificate  sets forth the text of the Articles of Incorporation as amended and
restated to the date of the certificate.

         Dated:    October 15, 1998.

                                            PACIFIC MAGTRON INTERNATIONAL CORP.,
                                            a Nevada corporation


                                            /s/ Theodore S. Li
                                            ------------------------------------
                                            Theodore S. Li, President


                                            /s/ Hui Lee
                                            ------------------------------------
                                            Hui Lee, Secretary

                                       -5-

                           AMENDED AND RESTATED BYLAWS

                                       OF

                       PACIFIC MAGTRON INTERNATIONAL CORP.



                                    ARTICLE I

                                     OFFICES

         SECTION 1. PRINCIPAL  OFFICE.  The principal  office of the Corporation
shall be located in the City of Reno, Washoe County, State of Nevada.

         SECTION 2. OTHER OFFICES.  In addition to the principal  office,  other
offices may also be maintained  at such other place or places,  either within or
without the State of Nevada, as may be designated from time to time by the Board
of Directors,  where any and all business of the  Corporation may be transacted,
and where meetings of the stockholders and of the Directors may be held with the
same effect as though done or held at said principal office.

                                   ARTICLE II

                           MEETING OF THE STOCKHOLDERS

         SECTION 1. ANNUAL  MEETINGS.  The annual  meeting of the  shareholders,
commencing  with the year 1996,  shall be held at the  registered  office of the
corporation,  or at such other place as may be  specified or fixed in the notice
of said  meetings  in the  month of or the month  preceding  the due date of the
annual list of the officers and directors of the corporation at such time as the
shareholders shall decide, for the election of directors and for the transaction
of such other business as may properly come before said meeting.

         SECTION 2. NOTICE OF ANNUAL  MEETING.  The Secretary shall mail, in the
manner provided in Section 5 of Article 11 of these Bylaws, or deliver a written
or printed notice of each annual meeting to each stockholder of record, entitled
to vote thereat, or may notify by telegram,  at least ten (10) and not more than
sixty (60) days before the date of such meeting.

         SECTION 3. PLACE OF MEETINGS.  The Board of Directors may designate any
place  either  within or without the State of Nevada as the place of meeting for
annual meeting or for any special  meeting  called by the Board of Directors.  A
waiver of notice  signed by all  stockholders  may  designate  any place  either
within or without the State of Nevada, as the place for holding of such meeting.
If no  designation  is made, or if a special  meeting is otherwise  called,  the
place of

                                       -1-
<PAGE>
meeting shall be the  principal  office of  Corporation  in the State of Nevada,
except as otherwise provided in Section 6, Article II of these Bylaws,  entitled
"Meeting of All Stockholders".

         SECTION 4. SPECIAL MEETINGS. Special meetings of the stockholders shall
be held at the  principal  office of the  Corporation  or at such other place as
shall  be  specified  or  fixed  in  a  notice  hereof.  Such  meetings  of  the
stockholders  may be called at any time by the President or  Secretary,  or by a
majority of the Board of  Directors  then in office,  and shall be called by the
President with or without Board  approval on the written  request of the holders
of  record  of at least  fifty  percent  (50%) of the  number  of  shares of the
Corporation  then  outstanding and entitled to vote, which written request shall
state the object of such meeting.

         SECTION 5. NOTICE OF  MEETING.  Written or printed  notice  stating the
place, day and hour of the meeting and, in case of special meeting,  the purpose
for which the meeting is called,  shall be delivered  not less than ten (10) nor
more than sixty (60) days before the date of the meeting,  either  personally or
by mail,  by or at the  direction  of the  President  or the  Secretary  to each
stockholder of record entitled to vote at such meeting.  If mailed,  such notice
shall be deemed to be  delivered  when  deposited  in the  United  States  mail,
addressed to the  stockholder at his/her address as it appears on the records of
the Corporation, with postage prepaid.

         Any stockholder may at any time, by duly signed statement in writing to
that effect,  waive any  statutory or other notice of any meeting,  whether such
statement be signed before or after such meeting.

         SECTION 6. MEETING OF ALL STOCKHOLDERS.  If all the stockholders  shall
meet at any time and place,  either  within or without the State of Nevada,  and
consent to the holding of the meeting at such time and place, such meeting shall
be valid without call or notice and at such meeting any corporate  action may be
taken.

         SECTION 7.  QUORUM.  At all  stockholders'  meetings,  the  presence in
person  or by  proxy of the  holders  of a  majority  of the  outstanding  stock
entitled to vote shall be necessary to  constitute a quorum for the  transaction
of business,  but a lesser  number may adjourn to some future time not less than
seven (7) nor more than  twenty-one  (21) days later,  and the  Secretary  shall
thereupon  give at least  three  (3) days'  notice by mail to each  stockholders
entitled to vote who is absent from such meeting.

         SECTION 8. MODE OF VOTING.  At all  meetings  of the  stockholders  the
voting  may be a voice  vote,  but any  qualified  voter may demand a stock vote
whereupon  such stock vote shall be taken by ballot,  each of which  shall state
the name of the  stockholder  voting and the  number of shares  voted by him/her
and,  if such  ballot be cast by  proxy,  it shall  also  state the name of such
proxy; provided,  however, that the mode of voting prescribed by statute for any
particular case shall be in such case followed.

                                       -2-
<PAGE>
         SECTION 9. PROXIES. At any meeting of the stockholders, any stockholder
may be represented and vote by a proxy or proxies  appointed by an instrument in
writing. In the event any such instrument in writing shall designate two or more
persons to act as proxies, a majority of such persons present at the meeting, or
if only one shall be present,  then that one shall have and may  exercise all of
the powers  conferred  by such  written  instrument  upon all of the  persons so
designated unless the instrument shall otherwise provide. No such proxy shall be
valid after the  expiration  of six (6) months  from the date of its  execution,
unless  coupled  with an interest,  or unless the person  executing it specified
therein  the length of time for which it is to  continue  in force,  which in no
case shall exceed seven (7) years from the date of its execution. Subject to the
above,  any proxy duly  executed is not revoked and  continues in full force and
effect until any  instrument  revoking it or duly executed proxy bearing a later
date is filed with the Secretary of the Corporation.  At no time shall any proxy
be valid which shall be filed less than ten (10) hours  before the  commencement
of the meeting.

         SECTION  10.  VOTING  LISTS.  The  officer  or agent in  charge  of the
transfer books for shares of the corporation shall make, at least three (3) days
before  each  meeting  of  stockholders,  a  complete  list of the  stockholders
entitled to vote at such meeting, arranged in alphabetical order with the number
of shares  held by each,  which  list for a period of two (2) days prior to such
meeting shall be kept on file at the registered  office of the  corporation  and
shall be subject to inspection by any  stockholder  at any time during the whole
time of the meeting.  The original  share ledger or transfer  book, or duplicate
thereof,  kept in this state,  shall be PRIMA  FACIE  evidence as to who are the
stockholders  entitled to examine such list or share ledger or transfer  book or
to vote at any meeting of stockholders.

         SECTION 11.  CLOSING  TRANSFER  BOOKS OR FIXING OR RECORD DATE. For the
purpose  of  determining  stockholders  entitled  to  notice  or to vote for any
meeting of  stockholders,  the Board of Directors of the Corporation may provide
that the stock transfer books be closed for a stated period but not to exceed in
any case sixty (60) days before such determination.  If the stock transfer books
are closed for the purpose of determining  stockholders  entitled to notice of a
meeting of  stockholders,  such books shall be closed for at least  fifteen (15)
days immediately  preceding such meeting.  In lieu of closing the stock transfer
books,  the Board of  Directors  may fix in advance a date in any case to be not
more than  sixty  (60)  days,  not less than ten (10) days  prior to the date on
which the particular action, requiring such determination of stockholders, is to
be taken. If the stock transfer books are not closed and no record date is fixed
for determination of stockholders entitled to notice of meeting of stockholders,
or  stockholders  entitled to receive  payment of a dividend,  the date on which
notice of the meeting is mailed or the date on which the resolution of the Board
of Directors  declaring  such dividend is adopted,  as the case may be, shall be
the record of date for such determinations of shareholders.

         SECTION 12. VOTING OF SHARES BY CERTAIN HOLDERS. Shares standing in the
name of another corporation,  domestic or foreign, may be voted by such officer,
agent or proxy as the  Bylaws  of such  corporation  by  prescribe,  or,  in the
absence of such  provisions,  the Board of  Directors  of such  corporation  may
determine.

                                       -3-
<PAGE>
         Shares  standing  in the  name of a  deceased  person  may be  voted by
his/her administrator or executor, either in person or by proxy. Shares standing
in the  name of the  guardian,  conservator  or  trustee  may be  voted  by such
fiduciary either in person or by proxy, but no guardian, conservator, or trustee
shall be  entitled,  as such  fiduciary,  to vote  shares  held by him without a
transfer of such shares into his/her name.

         Shares  standing  in the  name  of a  receiver  may be  voted  by  such
receiver,  and shares held by or under the control of a receiver may be voted by
such receiver  without the transfer  thereof into his name if authority so to do
be contained  in an  appropriate  order of the court at which such  receiver was
appointed.

         A  stockholder  whose shares are pledged shall be entitled to vote such
shares until  shares have been  transferred  into the name of the  pledgee,  and
thereafter the pledgee shall be entitled to vote the shares so transferred.

         Shares of its own stock belonging to this  corporation  shall not vote,
directly or  indirectly,  at any meeting and shall not be counted in determining
the total number of outstanding  shares at any time, but shares of its own stock
held by it in a  fiduciary  capacity  may be  voted  and  shall  be  counted  in
determining the total number of outstanding shares at any given time.

         SECTION 13. INFORMAL ACTION BY STOCKHOLDERS.  Any action is required to
be taken at a meeting of the stockholders or any other action which may be taken
at a meeting of the  stockholders  except the election of directors may be taken
without a meeting  if a consent  in  writing  setting  forth the action so taken
shall be signed by all of the stockholders  entitled to vote with respect to the
subject matter thereof.

         SECTION 14. VOTING OF SHARES.  Each outstanding  share entitled to vote
shall be  entitled  to one (1) vote  upon  each  matter  submitted  to vote at a
meeting of stockholders.

                                   ARTICLE III

                                    DIRECTORS

         SECTION  1.  GENERAL  POWERS.  The Board of  Directors  shall  have the
control and general  management of the affairs and business of the  Corporation.
Such  directors  shall in all  cases  act as  Board,  regularly  convened,  by a
majority, and they may adopt such rules and regulations for the conduct of their
meetings and the  management of the  Corporation,  as they may deem proper,  not
inconsistent  with these Bylaws,  Articles of Incorporation  and the laws of the
State of Nevada. The Board of Directors shall further have the right to delegate
certain other powers to the Executive Committee as provided in these Bylaws.

         SECTION 2.  NUMBER OF  DIRECTORS.  The  affairs  and  business  of this
Corporation shall be managed by a Board of Directors consisting of not less than
one (1) or more than  seven (7),  until  changed by  amendment  to these  Bylaws
adopted by the shareholders amending this

                                       -4-
<PAGE>
Section 2, Article III, and except as authorized by the Nevada Revised Statutes,
there shall in no event be less than one (1) Director.

         SECTION 3. ELECTION.  The Directors of the Corporation shall be elected
at the  annual  meeting  of the  stockholders  except as  hereinafter  otherwise
provided for the filling of  vacancies.  Each  Director  shall hold office for a
term of one (1) year and until his  successor  shall have duly  chosen and shall
have qualified,  or until his death, or until he shall resign or shall have been
removed in the manner hereinafter provided.

         SECTION  4.  VACANCIES  IN THE  BOARD.  Any  vacancy  in the  Board  of
Directors occurring during the year through death, resignation, removal or other
cause,  including  vacancies  caused by an increase in the number of  directors,
shall be filled for the  unexpired  portion  they  constitute  a quorum,  at any
special meeting of the Board called for that purpose,  or at any regular meeting
thereof,  provided,  however,  that in the event the remaining  directors do not
represent  a quorum of the number set forth in Section 2 hereof,  a majority  of
such remaining directors may elect directors to fill any vacancies.

         SECTION 5. DIRECTORS MEETINGS. Annual meeting of the Board of Directors
shall  be held  each  year  immediately  following  the  annual  meeting  of the
stockholders.  Other regular  meetings of the Board of Directors shall from time
to time by resolution be prescribed. No further notice of such annual or regular
meeting of the Board of Directors need be given.

         SECTION 6. SPECIAL MEETINGS. Special meetings of the Board of Directors
may be called by or at the request of the President or any Director.  The person
or persons  authorized  to call  meetings of the Board of Directors  may fix any
place,  either  within or without the State of Nevada,  as the place for holding
any special meeting of the Board of Directors called by them.

         SECTION 7.  NOTICE.  Notice of any  special  meeting  shall be given at
least  twenty-four  (24) hours previous  thereto by written notice if personally
delivered,  or five (5) days previous  thereto if mailed to each Director at his
business address, or by telegram. If mailed, such notice shall be deemed to have
been  delivered  when  deposited  in the United  States mail so  addressed  with
postage thereon  prepaid.  If notice is given by telegram,  such notice shall be
deemed to be delivered when the telegram is delivered to the telegraph  company.
Any Director may waive notice of any meeting.  The  attendance  of a Director at
any meeting shall constitute a waiver of notice of such meeting,  except where a
Director  attends  a  meeting  for  the  express  purpose  of  objecting  to the
transaction  of any  business  because  the  meeting is not  lawfully  called or
convened.

         SECTION 8.  CHAIRMAN.  At all meetings of the Board of  Directors,  the
President  shall  serve as  Chairman,  or in the absence of the  President,  the
Directors  present  shall  choose by  majority  vote a  Director  to  preside as
Chairman.

                                       -5-
<PAGE>
         SECTION 9. QUORUM AND MANNER OF ACTING. A majority of Directors,  whose
number is  designated  in Section 2 herein,  shall  constitute  a quorum for the
transaction  of  business  at any  meeting  and  the  act of a  majority  of the
Directors  present at any meeting at which a quorum is present  shall be the act
of the Board of  Directors.  In the  absence of a quorum,  the  majority  of the
Directors  present may  adjourn any meeting  from time to time until a quorum is
had. Notice of any adjourned  meeting need not be given. The Directors shall act
only as a Board and the individual Directors shall have no power as such.

         SECTION 10. REMOVAL OF DIRECTORS.  Any one or more of the Directors may
be  removed  either  with or  without  cause at any time by the vote or  written
consent of the  stockholders  representing not less than two-thirds (2/3) of the
issued and outstanding capital stock entitled to voting power.

         SECTION 11.  VOTING.  At all meetings of the Board of  Directors,  each
Director is to have one (1) vote,  irrespective of the number of shares of stock
that he may hold.

         SECTION 12. COMPENSATION.  By resolution of the Board of Directors, the
Directors may be paid their  expenses,  if any, of attendance of each meeting of
the Board,  and may be paid a fixed sum for  attendance  at meetings or a stated
salary of Directors.  No such payment  shall  preclude any Director from serving
the Corporation in any other capacity and receiving compensation therefor.

         SECTION 13. PRESUMPTION OF ASSENT. A Director of the Corporation who is
present at a meeting of the Board of Directors at which action on any  corporate
matter is taken,  shall be conclusively  presumed to have assented to the action
unless his/her  dissent shall be entered in the minutes of the meeting or unless
he/she shall file his/her  written dissent to such action with the person acting
as the  Secretary of the meeting  before the  adjournment  thereof or shall file
forward such dissent by certified  or  registered  mail to the  Secretary of the
Corporation  immediately  after the  adjournment  of the meeting.  Such right to
dissent shall not apply to a Director who voted in favor of such action.

                                   ARTICLE IV

                               EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE

         SECTION 1.  NUMBER AND  ELECTION.  The Board of  Directors  may, in its
discretion,  appoint from its  membership  an Executive  Committee of one (1) or
more Directors, each to serve at the pleasure of the Board of Directors.

         SECTION 2. AUTHORITY. The Executive Committee is authorized to take any
action  which the Board of  Directors  could  take,  except  that the  Executive
Committee  shall not have the power to either issue or authorize the issuance of
shares of capital stock, to amend the Bylaws,

                                       -6-
<PAGE>
or a resolution of the Board of Directors.  Any  authorized  action taken by the
Executive  Committee  shall be as  effective as if it had been taken by the full
Board of Directors.

         SECTION  3.  REGULAR  MEETINGS.   Regular  meetings  of  the  Executive
Committee  may be held  within or  without  the State of Nevada at such time and
place as the Executive Committee may provide from time to time.

         SECTION  4.  SPECIAL  MEETINGS.   Special  meetings  of  the  Executive
Committee  may be called by or at the request of the  President or any member of
the Executive Committee.

         SECTION 5.  NOTICE.  Notice of any  special  meeting  shall be given at
least one (1) day previous thereto by written notice, telephone,  telegram or in
person.  Neither the business to be transacted,  nor the purpose of a regular or
special  meeting of the Executive  Committee  need be specified in the notice of
waiver of notice of such  meeting.  A member may waive  notice of any meeting of
the  Executive  Committee.  The  attendance  of a member  at any  meeting  shall
constitute a waiver of notice of such meeting,  except where a member  attends a
meeting for the express  purpose of objecting to the transaction of any business
because the meeting is not lawfully called or convened.

         SECTION 6. QUORUM. A majority of the members of the Executive Committee
shall  constitute a quorum for the transaction of business at any meeting of the
Executive  Committee;  provided that if fewer than a majority of the members are
present at said  meeting a majority  of the  members  present  may  adjourn  the
meeting from time to time without further notice.

         SECTION 7.  MANNER OF ACTING.  The act of the  majority  of the members
present  at a  meeting  at which a  quorum  is  present  shall be the act of the
Executive  Committee,  and said  Committee  shall  keep  regular  minutes of its
proceedings  which  shall at all  times be open for  inspection  by the Board of
Directors.

         SECTION 8. PRESUMPTION OF ASSENT.  A member of the Executive  Committee
who is present at a meeting of the  Executive  Committee  at which action on any
corporate  matter is taken,  shall be conclusively  presumed to have assented to
the action taken unless  his/her  dissent shall be entered in the minutes of the
meeting or unless he/she shall file his written  dissent to such action with the
person acting as Secretary of the meeting  before the  adjournment  thereof,  or
shall forward such dissent by certified or  registered  mail to the Secretary of
the Corporation  immediately after the adjournment of the meeting. Such right to
dissent  shall  not apply to a member of the  Executive  Committee  who voted in
favor of such action.

                                       -7-
<PAGE>
                                    ARTICLE V

                                    OFFICERS

         SECTION  1.  NUMBER.  The  officers  of  the  Corporation  shall  be  a
President,  Vice  President,  a  Treasurer  and a  Secretary  and such  other or
subordinate  officers as the Board of Directors may from time to time elect. One
(1) person may hold the  office  and  perform  the duties of one or more of said
officers. No officer need be a member of the Board of Directors.

         SECTION 2. ELECTION,  TERM OF OFFICE,  QUALIFICATIONS.  The officers of
the  Corporation  shall be chosen by the Board of  Directors  and they  shall be
elected annually at the meeting of the Board of Directors held immediately after
each annual meeting of the stockholders except as hereinafter otherwise provided
for filling  vacancies.  Each officer  shall hold his/her  office until  his/her
successor has been duly chosen and has  qualified,  or until his/her  death,  or
until he/she resigns or has been removed in the manner hereinafter provided.

         SECTION 3.  REMOVALS.  Any officer or agent elected or appointed by the
Board of Directors may be removed by the Board of Directors at any time whenever
in its judgment the best interests of the  Corporation  would be served thereby,
and such removal shall be without  prejudice to the contract rights,  if any, or
the person so removed.

         SECTION 4.  VACANCIES.  All  vacancies in any office shall be filled by
the Board of Directors  without  undue delay,  at any regular  meeting,  or at a
meeting specially called for that purpose.

         SECTION  5.  PRESIDENT.  The  President  shall be the  Chief  Executive
Officer of the Corporation and shall have general  supervision over the business
of the  Corporation  and over its several  officers,  subject,  however,  to the
control of the Board of Directors.  He/she may sign,  with the Treasurer or with
the  Secretary  or  any  other  proper  officer  of  the  Corporation  thereunto
authorized  by the Board of  Directors,  certificates  for shares of the capital
stock of the  Corporation;  may sign and execute in the name of the  Corporation
deeds, mortgages,  bonds, contracts or other instruments authorized by the Board
of  Directors,  except in cases where  signing and  execution  thereof  shall be
expressly  delegated  by the Board of Directors or by these Bylaws to some other
officer or agent of the  Corporation;  and in general  shall  perform all duties
incident to the duties of the  President,  and such other duties as from time to
time may be assigned to him/her by the Board of Directors.

         SECTION 6. VICE  PRESIDENT.  The Vice President shall in the absence or
incapacity of the  President,  or as ordered by the Board of Directors,  perform
the duties of the  President,  or such other duties or functions as may be given
to him by the Board of Directors from time to time.

                                       -8-
<PAGE>
         SECTION 7. TREASURER.  The Treasurer shall have the care and custody of
all the funds and securities of the Corporation and deposit the same in the name
of the  Corporation  in such bank or trust company as the Board of Directors may
designate;  he may sign or  countersign  all  checks,  drafts and orders for the
payment of money and may pay out and dispose of same under the  direction of the
Board of Directors,  and may sign or countersign all notes or other  obligations
of indebtedness of the Corporation;  he/she; may sign with the President or Vice
President,  certificates for shares of stock of the Corporation; he/she shall at
all  reasonable  times  exhibit  the  books  and  accounts  to any  director  or
stockholder of the  Corporation  under  application at the office of the Company
during business hours; and he/she shall, in general,  perform all duties as from
time to time may be  assigned  to  him/her by the  President  or by the Board of
Directors.  The  Board of  Directors  may at its  discretion  require  that each
officer  authorized to disburse the funds of the  Corporation  be bonded in such
amount as it may deem adequate.

         SECTION 8.  SECRETARY.  The  Secretary  shall  keep the  minutes of the
meetings of the Board of  Directors  and also the minutes of the meetings of the
stockholders;  he/she  shall  attend to the giving and serving of all notices of
the Corporation  and shall affix the seal of Corporation to all  certificates of
stock, when signed and countersigned by the duly authorized officers; he/she may
sign  certificates  for shares of stock of the  Corporation;  he/she may sign or
countersign all checks, drafts and orders for the payment of money; he/she shall
have charge of the certificate book and such other books and papers as the Board
may direct;  he/she shall keep a stock book containing the names  alphabetically
arranged, of all persons who are stockholders of the Corporation,  showing their
places of residence,  the number of shares held by them  respectively,  the time
when they respectively  became the owners thereof,  and the amount paid thereof;
and  he/she  shall in  general,  perform  all duties  incident  to the office of
Secretary  and such other duties as from time to time may be assigned to him/her
by the President or by the Board of Directors.

         SECTION 9. OTHER  OFFICERS.  The Board of Directors  may  authorize and
empower  other persons or other  officers  appointed by it to perform the duties
and  functions  of  the  officers  specifically   designated  above  by  special
resolution in each case.

         SECTION 10.  ASSISTANT TREASURERS AND ASSISTANT SECRETARIES.  The
Assistant  Treasurers  shall  respectively,  as may be  required by the Board of
Directors,  give bonds for the  faithful  discharge of their duties in such sums
and with such sureties as the Board of Directors shall determine.  The Assistant
Secretaries as thereunto  authorized by the Board of Directors may sign with the
President or Vice President  certificates for shares of the capital stock of the
Corporation,  issued of which shall have been  authorized  by  resolution of the
Board of Directors. The Assistant Treasurers and Assistant Secretaries shall, in
general,  perform such duties as may be assigned to them by the Treasurer or the
Secretary respectively, or by the President or by the Board of Directors.

                                       -9-
<PAGE>
                                   ARTICLE VI

                    INDEMNIFICATION OF OFFICERS AND DIRECTORS

         Except as hereinafter stated otherwise, the Corporation shall indemnify
all of its officers and directors, past, present and future, against any and all
expenses  incurred by them,  and each of them including but not limited to legal
fees,  judgments and penalties which may be incurred,  rendered or levied in any
legal action brought  against any or all of them for or on account of any act or
omission  alleged to have been committed  while acting within the scope of their
duties as officers or directors of this Corporation.

                                   ARTICLE VII

                      CONTRACTS, LOANS, CHECKS AND DEPOSITS

         SECTION 1. CONTRACTS.  The Board of Directors may authorize any officer
or  officers,  agent or agents to enter into any contract or execute and deliver
any  instrument  in the  name of and on  behalf  of the  Corporation,  and  such
authority may be general or confined to specific instances.

         SECTION  2.  LOANS.  No loans  shall be  contracted  on  behalf  of the
Corporation and no evidence of  indebtedness  shall be issued in its name unless
authorized by the Board of Directors or approved by loan committee  appointed by
the Board of  Directors  and charged with the duty of  supervising  investments.
Such authority may be general or confined to specific instances.

         SECTION 3.  CHECKS,  DRAFTS,  ETC. A check,  draft or other  orders for
payment of money, notes or other evidences of indebtedness issued in the name of
the Corporation shall be signed by such officer or officers,  agent or agents of
the  Corporation  and in such manner as shall from time to time be determined by
resolutions of the Board of Directors.

         SECTION  4.  DEPOSITS.  All  funds  of the  Corporation  not  otherwise
employed shall be deposited  from time to time to the credit of the  Corporation
in such banks,  trust companies or other  depositories as the Board of Directors
may select.

                                  ARTICLE VIII

                                  CAPITAL STOCK

         SECTION 1. CERTIFICATE FOR SHARES. Certificates for shares of stocks of
the Corporation  shall be in such form as shall be approved by the incorporators
or by the Board of Directors. The certificates shall be numbered in the order of
their  issue,  shall be signed by the  President  or Vice  President  and by the
Secretary or the Treasurer, or by such other person or

                                      -10-
<PAGE>
officer  as may be  designed  by the  Board  of  Directors;  and the seal of the
Corporation  shall  be  affixed  thereto,  which  said  signatures  of the  duly
designated  officers  and of the  seal  of the  Corporation.  Every  certificate
authenticated  by a facsimile of such signatures and seal must be  countersigned
by a Transfer Agent to be appointed by the Board of Directors, before issuance.

         SECTION 2.  TRANSFER OF STOCK.  Shares of the stock of the  Corporation
may be transferred by the delivery of the certificate  accompanied  either by an
assignment  in writing  on the back of the  certificate  or by written  power of
attorney to sell, assign, and transfer the same on the books of the Corporation,
signed by the person  appearing  by the  certificate  to the owner of the shares
represented thereby,  together with all necessary federal and state transfer tax
stamps affixed and shall be transferable  on the books of the  Corporation  upon
surrender  thereof so signed or endorsed.  The person registered on the books of
the  Corporation  as the owner of any shares of stock  shall be  entitled to all
rights of ownership with respect to such shares.

         SECTION 3. REGULATIONS.  The Board of Directors may make such rules and
regulations  as it may deem expedient not  inconsistent  with the Bylaws or with
the Articles of Incorporation,  concerning the issue,  transfer and registration
of the  certificates  for  shares  of stock  of the  Corporation.  The  Board of
Directors may appoint a transfer  agent or registrar of transfers,  or both, and
it may require all certificates to bear the signature of either or both.

         SECTION 4.  LOST CERTIFICATES.  The Board of Directors may direct a new
certificate  or  certificates  to be  issued  in  place  of any  certificate  or
certificates  theretofore issued by the Corporation alleged to have been lost or
destroyed,  upon the making of an affidavit of that fact by the person  claiming
the certificate of stock to be lost or destroyed. When authorizing such issue of
a new certificate or certificates, the Board of Directors may, in its discretion
and as a condition  precedent  to the issue  thereof,  require the owner of such
lost or destroyed certificate or certificates,  or his/her legal representative,
to  advertise  the same in such  manner  as it  shall  require  and/or  give the
Corporation  a bond in such sum as it may direct as indemnity  against any claim
that may be made against the Corporation with respect to the certificate alleged
to have been lost or destroyed.

                                   ARTICLE IX

                                    DIVIDENDS

         SECTION 1. The Corporation shall be entitled to treat the holder of any
share or shares of stock as the holder in fact thereof and,  accordingly,  shall
not be bound to  recognize  any  equitable or other claim to or interest in such
shares on the part of any other person,  whether or not it shall have express or
other notice thereof, except as expressly provided by the laws of Nevada.

                                      -11-
<PAGE>
         SECTION 2. Dividends on the capital stock of the  Corporation,  subject
to the provisions of the Articles of  Incorporation,  if any, may be declared by
the Board of Directors at any regular or special meeting, pursuant to law.

         SECTION 3. The Board of Directors  may close the transfer  books in its
discretion for a period not exceeding fifteen (15) days preceding the date fixed
for  holding  any  meeting,  annual or special of the  stockholders,  or the day
appointed for the payment of a dividend.

         SECTION 4. Before payment of any dividend or making any distribution of
profits,  there may be set aside out of funds of the  Corporation  available for
dividends,  such sum or sums as the  Directors  may from time to time,  in their
absolute discretion think proper as a reserve fund to meet contingencies, or for
equalizing  dividends,  or for  repairing  or  maintaining  any  property of the
Corporation,  or for  any  such  other  purpose  as the  Directors  shall  think
conducive to the interest of the  Corporation,  and the  Directors may modify or
abolish any such reserve in the manner in which it was created.

                                    ARTICLE X

                                      SEAL

         The Board of Directors shall provide a Corporate Seal which shall be in
the form of a circle and shall bear the full name of the  Corporation,  the year
of its incorporation and the words "Corporate Seal, State of Nevada".

                                   ARTICLE XI

                                   FISCAL YEAR

         The  fiscal  year  of the  Corporation  shall  end on the  31st  day of
December of each year.

                                   ARTICLE XII

                                WAIVER OF NOTICE

         Whenever  any  notice  whatever  is  required  to be  given  under  the
provisions of these Bylaws,  or under the laws of the State of Nevada,  or under
the provisions of the Articles of  Incorporation,  a waiver in writing signed by
the person or persons entitled to such notice,  whether before or after the time
stated therein, shall be deemed equivalent to the giving of such notice.

                                      -12-
<PAGE>
                                  ARTICLE XIII

                                   AMENDMENTS

         These Bylaws may be altered,  amended or repealed and new Bylaws may be
adopted at any regular or special  meeting of the  stockholders by a vote of the
stockholders  owning  a  majority  of the  shares  and  entitled  to vote at the
meeting.  These  Bylaws may also be altered,  amended or repealed and new Bylaws
may be adopted at any regular or special  meeting of the Board of  Directors  of
the  Corporation  (if notice of such  alteration  or repeal be  contained in the
notice of such special  meeting) by a majority vote of the Directors  present at
the meeting at which a quorum is present,  but any such  amendment  shall not be
inconsistent  with or contrary to the provision of any amendment  adopted by the
stockholders.

         KNOW  ALL  MEN BY  THESE  PRESENTS  that  the  undersigned,  being  the
Secretary of PACIFIC MAGTRON  INTERNATIONAL  CORP., a Nevada  corporation hereby
acknowledges that the above and foregoing Bylaws were duly adopted as the Bylaws
of said Corporation on July 16, 1998.

         IN  WITNESS  WHEREOF,  I  hereunto  subscribe  my name this 14th day of
January 1999.


                                                     /s/ Hui Lee
                                          --------------------------------------
                                          Hui Lee, Secretary

                                      -13-

                       PACIFIC MAGTRON INTERNATIONAL CORP.

                             1998 STOCK OPTION PLAN

The following definitions shall be applicable throughout the Plan:

         (a) "BOARD" means the Board of Directors of the Company.

         (b)  "ARTICLES  OF  INCORPORATION"  means  the  Company's  Articles  of
Incorporation, as amended or restated from time to time.

         (c) "CODE"  means the Internal  Revenue  Code of 1986,  as amended from
time to time.  Reference  in the Plan to any Section of the Code shall be deemed
to include any amendments or successor  provisions to such Section and any rules
or regulations under such Section.

         (d)  "COMMITTEE"  means  the  committee   appointed  by  the  Board  to
administer the Plan as referred to in Article V.

         (e)  "COMMISSION"  means the Securities and Exchange  Commission or any
successor agency.

         (f)  "COMPANY"  means Pacific  Magtron  International  Corp.,  a Nevada
corporation.

         (g) "DATE OF GRANT"  means the date on which the  granting of an Option
is  authorized  by the Board or such later date as may be specified by the Board
in such authorization as referred to in Article V.

         (h)  "ELIGIBLE  EMPLOYEE"  means any person  regularly  employed by the
Company or a Subsidiary on a full-time  salaried  basis who satisfies all of the
requirements of Article IX.

         (i)  "EXCHANGE  ACT"  means the  Securities  Exchange  Act of 1934,  as
amended from time to time, and the rules and regulations promulgated thereunder.

         (j) "FAIR MARKET VALUE" is defined in Article IV.

         (k) "HOLDER"  means an employee of the Company or a Subsidiary  who has
been granted an Option.

         (l)  "INCENTIVE  STOCK  OPTION"  means any  Option  intended  to be and
designated  as an "incentive  stock option"  within the meaning of ss.422 of the
Code.

         (m)  "NON-EMPLOYEE  DIRECTOR" means a member of the Board who qualifies
as a  "Non-Employee  Director" as defined in Rule 16b-3,  as  promulgated by the
Commission  under the Exchange Act or any  successor  definition  adopted by the
Commission.
<PAGE>
         (n)  "NON-STATUTORY  OPTION"  means an Option which is not an Incentive
Stock Option.

         (o) "NORMAL  TERMINATION"  means termination at retirement  pursuant to
the Company or Subsidiary retirement plan then in effect.

         (p) "OPTION"  means an award  granted  under Article IX of the Plan and
includes both Non-Statutory Options and Incentive Stock Options.

         (q) "PLAN" means this 1998 Stock Option Plan.

         (r) "SECURITIES  ACT" means the Securities Act of 1933, as amended from
time to time, and the rules and regulations promulgated thereunder.

         (s) "SHARE" means a share of Stock.

         (t)  "STOCK"  means  common  stock of the Company as  described  in the
Articles of Incorporation.

         (u) "SUBSIDIARY" means "subsidiary corporation" as defined in ss.424(f)
of the Code.

         (v) "TERMINATION"  means separation from employment with the Company or
any of its Subsidiaries for any reason except due to death.

         (w)  "TREASURY"  means the  Department  of the  Treasury  of the United
States of America.

                                   ARTICLE I.

                       DESIGNATION AND PURPOSE OF THE PLAN

         The Plan shall be known as the "1998 Stock Option Plan." The purpose of
the Plan is to provide  additional  incentives  to  Employees  and  Non-Employee
Directors  of the  Company  to achieve  financial  results  aimed at  increasing
shareholder  value and to attract and retain the best  available  personnel  for
positions of  responsibility  within the Company through the grant of options to
purchase  shares of the  Company's  Common  Stock.  The Plan was approved by the
Board,  subject to the approval by the  shareholders of the Company,  on July 1,
1998. Subject to the determination of the Board or a Committee  appointed by the
Board,  Options  granted  under  this Plan may be  Incentive  Stock  Options  or
Non-Statutory Options.

                                      - 2 -
<PAGE>
                                   ARTICLE II.

                          SHARES AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE

         A maximum of 1,000,000  authorized but unissued shares of the Company's
common stock may be issued upon the exercise of Options granted  pursuant to the
Plan.  Shares  reserved  for  issuance  shall be deemed to have been used in the
exercise of Options whether actually  delivered or whether the Fair Market Value
equivalent  of such  Shares is paid in cash.  If an Eligible  Employee  pays the
exercise  price of any given  Option  by  having  Shares  withheld  which,  upon
exercise,  would have a Fair  Market  Value at the time the Option is  exercised
equal to the Option  price,  then the withheld  shares will not be deducted from
those shares reserved for issuance under the Plan. Also, if the Company,  at any
time during the effective  period of this plan,  repurchases  Shares on the open
market,  then the Board may, but is not required to, add such Shares to the pool
of Shares reserved for issuance under this Plan.  However,  the number of Shares
authorized for issuance  under the Plan may never exceed  1,000,000 at any given
time.

         In the  event  that  any  Option  granted  under  the Plan  expires  or
terminates for any reason whatsoever  without having been exercised in full, the
Shares  subject to, but not delivered  under such Option shall become  available
for other Options which may be granted under the Plan; or shall be available for
any other lawful corporate purpose.

                                  ARTICLE III.

                         LIMIT ON VALUE OF OPTION SHARES

         In the case of an Incentive  Stock Option,  the  aggregate  Fair Market
Value  (determined  as of the time such  Option is  granted)  of the Shares with
respect to which the Incentive Stock Option is exercisable for the first time by
an individual  during any calendar  year (under all plans of the Company)  shall
not exceed $100,000.

                                   ARTICLE IV.

                       DETERMINATION OF FAIR MARKET VALUE

         As used herein the term "Fair Market Value" shall mean, with respect to
the date a given Option is granted or  exercised,  the value  determined  by the
Board or any Committee  appointed in  accordance  with Article VI hereof in good
faith  using a  generally  accepted  valuation  method  and,  in the  case of an
incentive  stock  option,  determined  in accordance  with  applicable  Treasury
regulations;  provided,  however,  that where  there is a public  market for the
common  stock of the  Company,  the Fair  Market  Value per  share  shall be the
average of the final bid and asked prices of the Stock on the date of grant,  as
reported  in THE WALL  STREET  JOURNAL  (or, if not so  reported,  as  otherwise
reported by the National  Association of Securities Dealers Automated  Quotation
System on the Nasdaq SmallCap Market, National Market or OTC Bulletin Board) or,
in the event the stock

                                      - 3 -
<PAGE>
is listed on a stock  exchange,  the fair  market  value per share  shall be the
closing price on such  exchange on the date of grant of the option,  as reported
in THE WALL STREET JOURNAL.

                                   ARTICLE V.

                       STOCK OPTIONS AND OPTION AGREEMENTS

         (a) Stock Options under the Plan may be of two types:  Incentive  Stock
Options and Non-Statutory  Options. Any Stock Option granted under the Plan will
be in such form as the Board may from time to time approve.  The Board will have
the  authority  to grant any optionee  Incentive  Stock  Options,  Non-Statutory
Options or both  types of  Options.  The Date of Grant of an Option  will be the
date the Board by resolution  selects an  individual to be a participant  in any
grant of an Option, determines the number of Shares to be subject to such Option
to be granted to such  individual  and specifies the terms and provisions of the
Option.  Incentive Stock Options may only be granted to Eligible  Employees.  To
the extent that any Option is not  designated  as an  Incentive  Stock Option or
even if so designated does not qualify as an Incentive Stock Option,  it will be
deemed to be a Non-Statutory  Option. The Board may grant Non-Statutory  Options
to Non-Employee  Directors under the Plan.  Anything in the Plan to the contrary
notwithstanding, no term of the Plan relating to Incentive Stock Options will be
interpreted,  amended or altered nor shall any  discretion or authority  granted
under the Plan be  exercised  so as to  disqualify  the Plan under ss.422 of the
Code or, without the consent of the optionee,  to disqualify any Incentive Stock
Option under such ss.422.

         (b) Each Option  granted under the Plan shall be evidenced by an option
agreement ("Option  Agreement"),  which shall indicate on its face whether it is
an agreement for an Incentive  Stock Option or a Non-Statutory  Option,  or both
and shall be signed by an officer of the Company on behalf of the Company and by
the employee who was granted the Option and which shall contain such  provisions
as may be  approved  by  the  Board  or any  Committee  appointed  by the  Board
according to Article VI. The provisions  shall be subject to the following terms
and conditions:

                  (i) Any Option or portion thereof that is exercisable shall be
         exercisable  as to such number of Shares and at such times as set forth
         in the Stock  Option  Agreement,  except as limited by the terms of the
         Plan heretofore;

                  (ii) Every Share  purchased  through the exercise of an Option
         shall  be paid  for in full at the time of the  exercise.  Each  Option
         shall  cease  to be  exercisable,  as to any  Share,  when  the  Holder
         purchases the Share, or when the Option lapses;

                  (iii) Options shall not be  transferable  by the Holder except
         by  will,  the  laws of  descent  and  distribution  or  pursuant  to a
         qualified  domestic relations order and shall be exercisable during the
         Holder's lifetime only by the Holder; and

                  (iv) An unexpired Option shall become immediately  exercisable
         (1)  automatically  on  the  Holder's  Normal  Termination,  (2) at the
         discretion  of the Board,  in whole or in part,  on the date the Holder
         becomes eligible to receive early

                                      - 4 -
<PAGE>
         retirement  benefits,  as  defined  under  the  retirement  plan of the
         Company then in effect,  (3) upon any change in control of the Company,
         and (4) under such other circumstances as the Board may direct.

         (c) The Option  Agreements shall constitute  binding  contracts between
the Company and the employee.  Every employee,  upon acceptance and execution of
such option  agreement,  shall be bound by the terms and conditions of this Plan
and of the Option Agreement.

         (d) The  terms  and  conditions  of the  Option  Agreement  shall be in
accordance   with  this  Plan,  but  may  include   additional   provisions  and
restrictions, provided that the same are not inconsistent with the Plan.

                                   ARTICLE VI.

                     COMPENSATION AND STOCK OPTION COMMITTEE

         The Plan shall be administered by the Board or a Committee appointed by
the Board in accordance with Rule 16b-3 of the Exchange Act ("Rule 16b-3").  Any
Committee  which has been  delegated the duty of  administering  the Plan by the
Board  shall  be  composed  of  two  or  more  persons  each  of  whom  (i) is a
Non-Employee   Director  and  (ii)  is  an  "outside  director"  as  defined  in
ss.162(m)(4)  of the Code. To the extent  reasonable and  practicable,  the Plan
shall be consistent with the provisions of Rule 16b-3 to the degree necessary to
ensure  that  transactions  authorized  pursuant to the Plan are exempt from the
operation  of  Section  16(b)  of the  Exchange  Act.  If  such a  Committee  is
appointed,  the  Committee  shall have the same power and authority to construe,
interpret  and  administer  the Plan and from time to time  adopt such rules and
regulations  for  carrying  out this Plan as it may deem  proper and in the best
interests of the Company as does the Board.  Any  reference  herein to the Board
shall, where appropriate, encompass a Committee appointed to administer the Plan
in accordance with this Article VI.

         The Board shall, from time to time, in its discretion,  determine which
of the Eligible  Employees  are to be granted  Options and the form,  amount and
timing of such Options and,  unless  otherwise  provided  herein,  the terms and
provisions thereof and the form of payment of an Option, if applicable, and such
other  matters  specifically  delegated  to It under this  Plan.  Subject to the
express  provisions of the Plan, the Board shall have authority to interpret the
Plan and Options granted  hereunder,  to prescribe,  amend and rescind rules and
regulations relating to the Plan, and to make all other determinations necessary
or advisable in  administering  the Plan, all of which  determinations  shall be
final and binding  upon all  persons.  A quorum of the Board shall  consist of a
majority  of its  members  and the  Board may act by vote of a  majority  of its
members  at a meeting  at which a quorum is  present,  or without a meeting by a
written  consent  to the action  taken  signed by all  members of the Board.  No
member  of  the  Board  shall  be  liable  for  any  action,  interpretation  or
construction  made in good faith with respect to the Plan or any Option  granted
hereunder.

                                      - 5 -
<PAGE>
                                  ARTICLE VII.

                                  OPTION PRICE

         The  Option  price at which  Shares  may be  purchased  under an Option
granted  pursuant  to this  Plan  shall  be set by the  Board,  but  shall in no
instance be less than the Fair Market  Value of such Shares on the Date of Grant
in the  case of  Incentive  Stock  Options.  Such  Fair  Market  Value  shall be
determined by the criteria set forth in Article IV hereof. The Option price will
be subject to adjustments in accordance with provisions of Article X herein.

         In the  event  that an  employee  granted  an  Incentive  Stock  Option
hereunder owns, directly or indirectly,  immediately after such grant, more than
10% of the  total  combined  voting  power  of all  classes  of the  issued  and
outstanding stock of the company, the option price shall be at least 110% of the
Fair  Market  Value of the stock  subject to the  Option and such  Option by its
terms shall not be  exercisable  after the expiration of five (5) years from the
date such Option is granted.

                                  ARTICLE VIII.

                               EXERCISE OF OPTION

         (a) Subject to the  provisions of Articles VII and IX the period during
which each Option may be exercised  shall be fixed by the Board at the time such
Option is granted, subject to the following rules:

                  (i) such Option is granted within ten (10) years from the date
         the  Plan  is  adopted,  or the  date  such  Plan  is  approved  by the
         stockholders, whichever is earlier;

                  (ii) such  Option by its  terms is not  exercisable  after the
         expiration of ten (10) years (in the case if Incentive  Stock  Options,
         not to exceed five years for Eligible  Employees  owning 10% or more of
         the combined  voting power of all classes of stock of the Company) from
         the Date of Grant as shall be set forth in the Stock  Option  Agreement
         relating to such grant; and,

                  (iii) such Option by its terms  states that a person's  rights
         and interests under the Plan,  including  amounts  payable,  may not be
         assigned, pledged, or transferred except, in the event of an employee's
         death,  to a designated  beneficiary as provided in the Plan, or in the
         absence  of  such  designation,  by will or the  laws  of  descent  and
         distribution and pursuant to a qualified domestic relations order.

         (b) An Option shall lapse under the following circumstances:

                  (i) Ten (10) years after it is  granted,  three  months  after
         Normal Termination,  twelve months after the date of Termination if due
         to permanent

                                      - 6 -
<PAGE>
         disability,  three  months after any other  Termination  or any earlier
         time set by the grant.

                  (ii) If the Holder dies within the Option  period,  the Option
         shall lapse unless it is exercised  within the Option  period and in no
         event  later  than  twelve  months  after  the date of his death by the
         Holder's legal  representative or  representatives  or by the person or
         persons  entitled to do so under the Holder's  last will and  testament
         or, if the Holder shall fail to make  testamentary  disposition of such
         Option or shall die  intestate,  by the person or persons  entitled  to
         receive  said  Option  under  the   applicable   laws  of  descent  and
         distribution.

                  (iii)  Notwithstanding  the  foregoing,  in no event shall the
         period of exercise be less than thirty days after Normal Termination or
         the death of the Holder;  provided,  however, that in no event shall an
         Incentive  Stock Option be exercised more than ten years after the Date
         of Grant.

         (c) No Shares shall be delivered  pursuant to any exercise of an Option
until the  requirements  of such laws and  regulations,  as may be deemed by the
Board to be  applicable,  are  satisfied and until payment in full of the option
price  specified in the  applicable  Stock  Option  Agreement is received by the
Company. No employee shall be deemed to be an owner of any Shares subject to any
Option  unless  and until the  certificate  or  certificates  for them have been
issued, as reflected on the stock record and transfer books of the Company.

                                   ARTICLE IX.

                                   ELIGIBILITY

         All employees of the Company,  including officers and directors who are
salaried  employees,  shall be Eligible  Employees eligible to participate under
this Plan.  The fact that an employee has been granted an Option under this Plan
shall not in any way affect or qualify the right of the  employee  to  terminate
his employment at any time. Nothing contained in this Plan shall be construed to
limit the right of the Company to grant  Options  otherwise  than under the Plan
for any  proper and  lawful  corporate  purpose,  including  but not  limited to
Options granted to employees. Employees to whom Options may be granted under the
Plan will be those  selected by the Committee from time to time who, in the sole
discretion of the Committee, have contributed in the past or who may be expected
to contribute  materially  in the future to the  successful  performance  of the
Company.

                                      - 7 -
<PAGE>
                                   ARTICLE X.

                       CAPITAL ADJUSTMENTS AFFECTING STOCK

         (a) If the  outstanding  Stock  of the  Company  shall  at any  time be
changed or exchanged by declaration of a stock dividend,  split-up,  combination
of  Shares,   recapitalization,   merger,  consolidation,   or  other  corporate
reorganization in which the Company is the surviving corporation, the number and
kind of  Shares  subject  to the  Plan or  subject  to any  Options  theretofore
granted, and the Option prices, shall be appropriately and equitably adjusted so
as to maintain the proportionate number of Shares without changing the aggregate
Option  price and the Board may make any other  adjustments  as the Board  deems
appropriate for purposes of the Plan. The  determination  of the Board as to the
terms of any  adjustment  shall be conclusive  except to the extent  governed by
Treasury regulations applicable to Incentive Stock Options.

         (b) In the event of a liquidation or  dissolution of the Company,  sale
of all or substantially all of its assets,  or a merger,  consolidation or other
corporate  reorganization in which the Company is not the surviving corporation,
or any merger or other  reorganization  in which the  Company  is the  surviving
corporation  but  the  holders  of  its  Stock  receive  securities  of  another
corporation,  or in the event a person makes a tender offer to the  stockholders
of the  Company,  the  Board  may,  but need not,  accelerate  the time at which
unexercised Options may be exercised. Nothing herein contained shall prevent the
substitution of a new Option by the surviving or acquiring corporation.

                                   ARTICLE XI.

                      AMENDMENTS, SUSPENSION OR TERMINATION

         (a) The Board shall have the right,  at any time, to amend,  suspend or
terminate the Plan, and if suspended,  reinstate the Plan in whole or in part in
any  respect  which  it may  deem to be in the best  interests  of the  Company,
provided, however, no amendments shall be made in the Plan which:

                  (i) Increase the total number of Shares for which  Options may
         be  granted  under this Plan for all  employees  or for any one of them
         except as provided in Article X;

                  (ii)  Change  the  minimum  purchase  price  for the  optioned
         Shares, except as provided in Article X;

                  (iii) Affect  outstanding  Options or any  unexercised  rights
         thereunder, except as provided in Article VIII;

                  (iv) Extend the option period provided in Article VIII or make
         an Option exercisable earlier than as specified in Article VIII; or

                  (v) Extend the termination date of the Plan.

                                      - 8 -
<PAGE>
         (b) The Board  shall  also have the  right,  with the  express  written
consent of an individual participant,  to cancel, reduce or otherwise alter such
participant's outstanding Options under the Plan.

         (c)  Any  such  amendment,   termination,   suspension,   cancellation,
reduction or alteration  shall be further  approved by the  shareholders  of the
Company if such  approval is required to preserve or comply with any  exemption,
whether under Rule 16b-3 or otherwise, from Section 16(b) of the Exchange Act or
to preserve the status of Incentive  Stock Options  within the meaning of ss.422
of the Code.

                                  ARTICLE XII.

                        EFFECTIVE DATE, TERM AND APPROVAL

         The  effective  date  for  this  Plan  shall  be upon  approval  by the
stockholders.  Options  may be  granted as  provided  herein for a period of ten
years after such date unless an earlier  termination date after which no Options
may be granted  under the Plan is fixed by action of the  Board,  but any Option
granted prior thereto may be exercised in accordance  with its terms.  The grant
of any Options under the Plan is effective only upon approval of the Plan by the
stockholders. The Plan and all Options granted pursuant to it are subject to all
laws, approvals,  requirements, and regulations of any governmental authority or
securities  exchange which may be applicable  thereto and,  notwithstanding  any
provisions of the Plan or option agreement, the Holder of an Option shall not be
entitled to exercise  his Option nor shall the Company be obligated to issue any
Shares to the Holder if such exercise or issuance  shall  constitute a violation
by the Holder or the  Company  of any  provisions  of any such laws,  approvals,
requirements,  or  regulations.  The Plan  shall  continue  in effect  until all
matters  relating  to  the  payment  of  Options  granted  under  the  Plan  and
administration of the Plan have been settled.

                                  ARTICLE XIII.

                                     GENERAL

         (a)  GOVERNMENT  AND  OTHER  REGULATIONS.  Shares  shall  not be issued
pursuant to the exercise of an Option unless the exercise of such Option and the
issuance  and  delivery of such Shares  pursuant  thereto  shall comply with all
relevant provisions of law, including,  without limitation,  the Securities Act,
the Exchange  Act, and the  requirements  of any stock  exchange  upon which the
Shares  may then be listed  and shall be  further  subject  to the  approval  of
counsel  for the  Company  with  respect to such  compliance.  Inability  of the
Company to obtain authority from any regulatory body having jurisdiction,  which
authority  is deemed by the  Company's  counsel  to be  necessary  to the lawful
issuance  and sale of any Shares  hereunder,  shall  relieve  the Company of any
liability  in  respect of the  failure to issue or sell such  Shares as to which
such requisite authority shall not have been obtained.

                                      - 9 -
<PAGE>
         (b) RESERVATION OF SHARES.  The Company,  during the term of this Plan,
will at all times reserve and keep  available  such number of Shares as shall be
sufficient to satisfy the requirements of the Plan. The inability of the Company
to  obtain  authority  from  any  regulatory  body  having  jurisdiction,  which
authority  is deemed by the  Company's  counsel  to be  necessary  to the lawful
issuance  and sale of any Shares  hereunder,  shall  relieve  the Company of any
liability  in  respect of the  failure to issue or sell such  Shares as to which
such requisite authority shall not have been obtained.

         (c) TAX WITHHOLDING.  The employee or other person receiving Stock upon
exercise of an Option may be required to pay to the Company or to a  Subsidiary,
as appropriate,  the amount of any such taxes which the Company or Subsidiary is
required  to  withhold  with  respect to such  Stock.  In  connection  with such
obligation to withhold tax, the Company may defer making  delivery of such Stock
unless and until indemnified on such withholding liability to its satisfaction.

         (d) CLAIM TO OPTIONS AND EMPLOYMENT RIGHTS. No employee or other person
shall have any claim or right to be granted  an Option  under the Plan.  Neither
this Plan nor any  action  taken  hereunder  shall be  construed  as giving  any
employee any right to be retained in the employ of the Company or a Subsidiary.

         (e)  BENEFICIARIES.  Any  issuance of shares  upon  exercise of Options
issued under this Plan to be made to a deceased participant shall be paid to the
beneficiary  designated by the  participant and filed with the Board. If no such
beneficiary has been designated or survives the  participant,  issuance shall be
made to the participant's legal representative. A beneficiary designation may be
aged or revoked by a  participant  at any time provided the change or revocation
is filed with the Board. The designation by a married participant of one or more
persons other than the participant's spouse must be consented to by the spouse.

         (f) INDEMNIFICATION.  Each person who is or shall have been a member of
the Board shall be indemnified and held harmless by the Company against and from
any loss,  cost,  liability,  or expense that may be imposed upon or  reasonably
incurred by him in connection with or resulting from any claim, action, suit, or
proceeding  to which he may be a party or in which he may be  involved by reason
of any action or failure to act under the Plan and  against and from any and all
amounts  paid by him in  satisfaction  of  judgment  in such  action,  suit,  or
proceeding  against  him. He shall give the Company an  opportunity,  at its own
expense, to handle and defend the same before he undertakes to handle and defend
it on his own  behalf.  The  foregoing  right of  indemnification  shall  not be
exclusive  of any other rights of  indemnification  to which such persons may be
entitled under the Company's Bylaws or Articles of Incorporation, as a matter of
law, or otherwise,  or any power that the Company may have to indemnify  them or
hold them harmless.

         (g)  RELIANCE  ON  REPORTS.  Each  member of the  Board  shall be fully
justified  in  relying  or  acting in good  faith  upon any  report  made by the
independent  public accountants of the Company and its Subsidiaries and upon any
other information furnished in connection with the Plan by any person or persons
other  than  himself.  In no event  shall any person who is or shall have been a
member of the Board be liable for any determination  made or other action taken,
including the furnishing of information, or failure to act, if in good faith.

                                     - 10 -
<PAGE>
         (h)  RELATIONSHIP TO OTHER BENEFITS.  No grant of any Options under the
Plan shall be taken into account in determining  any benefits under any pension,
retirement,  savings, profit sharing, group insurance,  welfare or other benefit
plan of the Company or any Subsidiary.

         (i) EXPENSES.  The expenses of administering the Plan shall be borne by
the Company and its Subsidiaries.

         (j) PRONOUNS.  Masculine  pronouns and other words of masculine  gender
shall refer to both men and women.

         (k) TITLES AND HEADINGS. The titles and headings of the Sections in the
Plan are for  convenience  of reference  only, and in the event of any conflict,
the text of the Plan, rather than such titles or headings, shall control.

         (l)  FRACTIONAL  SHARES.  No fractional  Shares shall be issued and the
Board shall determine  whether cash shall be given in lieu of fractional  Shares
or whether such fractional Shares shall be eliminated by rounding up or rounding
down unless otherwise provided in the Plan.

         (m) CONSTRUCTION OF PLAN. The place of administration of the Plan shall
be in the State of California  and the validity,  construction,  interpretation,
administration  and  effect of the Plan and of its rules  and  regulations,  and
rights relating to the Plan,  shall be determined in accordance with the laws of
the State of California.

                                     - 11 -

SONY
                       COMPONENT & COMPUTER PRODUCTS GROUP

                         VALUE ADDED RESELLER AGREEMENT

                              SONY ELECTRONICS INC.

THIS  AGREEMENT  is made this first day of May 1996,  by SONY  ELECTRONICS  INC.
through its COMPONENT & COMPUTER  PRODUCTS  GROUP.,  with a place of business at
3300  Zanker  Road,  San  Jose,  CA  95134  (hereinafter   referred  to  as  the
"Division"), and Pacific Magtron maintaining its principal office at 675 Palomar
Avenue, Sunnyvale, CA 94086 (hereinafter referred to as the "Buyer").

                                   WITNESSETH:

WHEREAS,  the Division is engaged in the sale,  licensing  and  distribution  of
various kinds of electronics products and accessories; and,

WHEREAS,  the Buyer desires to purchase  and/or license certain of such products
and  accessories  as part of systems  manufactured,  integrated  or assembled or
integrated by the Buyer for resale, leasing, licensing or other distribution.

NOW, THEREFORE, by reason of the foregoing premises, and in consideration of the
mutual covenants set forth in this Agreement, the parties agree as follows:

ARTICLE 1.0 DEFINITIONS. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS AGREEMENT:

1.1  The term the "Products" shall mean those products and accessories listed on
     Appendix I attached to this  Agreement  and made a part hereof,  which list
     may be  amended  from  time to  time by the  Division  adding  or  deleting
     products and accessories therefrom and by giving the Buyer notice thereof.

1.2  The term the  "Systems"  shall  mean  those  integrated  systems  generally
     described in Appendix I attached to this  Agreement and made a part hereof,
     that are manufactured,  integrated or assembled by the Buyer containing the
     Products  or that add  significant  value to the  Products  by the  Buyer's
     combination of same with products or accessories  manufactured,  integrated
     and/or assembled or distributed by the Buyer.

1.3  The term the "Customers" shall mean those customers for the Buyer's Systems
     in those  classes  of trade  designated  on  Appendix  I  attached  to this
     Agreement  and made a part hereof,  which  designation  may be amended from
     time to time by the Division adding or deleting  classes of trade therefrom
     and by giving the Buyer notice thereof.

ARTICLE 2.0 SCOPE OF THIS AGREEMENT.

2.1  General:  The Division agrees to sell and/or license,  and the Buyer agrees
     to purchase,  the Products from the Division for the Buyer's  incorporation
     thereof and/or license into the Systems for resale, as part of the Systems,
     to the Customers upon the terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement.
<PAGE>
2.2  Limitations:  The  Buyer  acknowledges  that its  right to  resell,  lease,
     license and distribute the Products under this Agreement is  non-exclusive,
     and that the  Division  reserves  the  right to sell,  lease,  license  and
     distribute  any of its  products  to any  customers  in the  world,  and to
     appoint, in its sole discretion, any additional resellers or third parties,
     including itself, at any location as may be chosen by the Division, without
     giving the Buyer notice thereof and without  incurring any liability to the
     Buyer therefor.

2.3  Status as  Independent  Contractor:  The Buyer  acknowledges  that it is an
     independent  contractor  of the  Division  and  that  it has  no  right  or
     authority to assume or create any obligation of any kind,  whether  express
     or implied,  on behalf of the Division.  The Buyer shall make no warranties
     or  representations to any third party with respect to any of the Products,
     except those expressly approved in writing by the Division.  The Buyer will
     defend,  indemnify and hold the Division  (and/or its officers,  directors,
     employees and agents) harmless from all suits,  claims,  losses and damages
     (including  reasonable attorney's fees) arising from any claims against the
     Division  as a result of the  Buyer's  default  in the  performance  of its
     obligations under the terms and conditions of this Agreement.

2.4  Access:  The  Buyer  shall  give the  Division  such  documentation  as the
     Division may  reasonably  request to verify the Buyer's  performance of its
     obligations under the terms and conditions of Section 5.4 and Appendix 1.

ARTICLE 3.0 ORDERING PROCEDURE.

3.1  Orders:  On or before the date first  above  written,  and on or before the
     start of each  calendar  month  thereafter,  the Buyer shall place with the
     Division  the  Buyer's  firm order for the  Products  it wishes to purchase
     and/or  License  for  delivery  during the  calendar  month  following  the
     Division's then current leadtimes therefor.  All the Buyer's orders will be
     in writing, will refer to this Agreement, and will indicate the quantities,
     shipping dates and shipping  destination  requested.  The Division reserves
     the right to reject  any Buyer  order  and each  Buyer  order  will only be
     deemed  accepted by the  Division  when  acknowledged  in writing or by the
     Division's delivery of the Products covered thereby.  Except as provided in
     this  Section,  any term or condition set forth in any Buyer order or other
     purchasing  document which are  inconsistent  with,  different from', or in
     addition to, the terms and conditions of this Agreement, will have no force
     or effect unless separately agreed to by the Division in writing.

3.2  Forecasts: No later than the tenth (10th) calendar day of each month during
     the  term of this  Agreement,  Buyer  shall  furnish  the  Division  with a
     non-binding forecast of its anticipated needs for the Products for delivery
     during the immediately following three (3) month period.

3.3  Purchases:  The Buyer shall use its best efforts to purchase and/or license
     for delivery during the term of this Agreement those minimum  quantities of
     the  Products  referred  to in  Appendix 2 attached  hereto and made a part
     hereof.  Such  minimum  purchase  requirement  will not be  interpreted  or
     construed as a "take or pay"  obligation on the part of the Buyer,  but may
     be used by the  Division to determine  whether it, in its sole  discretion,
     wishes to offer the Buyer the right to continue to purchase  and/or license
     the  Products  after the  expiration  or  termination  hereof  and/or as an
     eligibility   requirement  for  any  promotional   programs  and  the  like
     concerning  the  Products  the  Division  may wish to run  during  the term
     hereof.
                                        2
<PAGE>
ARTICLE 4.0 SALE OF THE PRODUCTS.

4.1  Terms:  The  Division  shall sell and/or  license the Products to the Buyer
     upon the terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement.

4.2  Prices: The Division shall sell and/or license the Products to the Buyer at
     the prices and fees set forth on Appendix 2 attached to this  Agreement and
     made a part hereof, subject to adjustment as provided for in that Appendix.
     Not withstanding the foregoing,  Division  reserves the right to adjust the
     prices for the Products by giving the Buyer notice thereof

4.3  Allocations:  The Division  reserves the right to allocate its inventory of
     Products in such a manner as it may, in its sole and  absolute  discretion,
     from time to time, determine without incurring any liability therefor.

4.4  Specifications:  The Buyer  acknowledges  that the Division may discontinue
     the sale and/or  licensing  of any of the  Products  and any parts  thereof
     (except where continued  availability is required by federal law) as it, in
     its sole  discretion,  determines,  without giving the Buyer notice thereof
     and without incurring any liability to the Buyer therefor.  Notwithstanding
     the  foregoing,  the  Division  will use its best efforts to give the Buyer
     prior notice of any such  discontinuance  or change affecting the Product's
     form, fit or function.  If, because of any  discontinuance or change to the
     Products  affecting  their form,  fit or  function,  Buyer does not wish to
     purchase  and/or license same or any of the other products  covered by this
     Agreement,  then the Buyer  may  terminate  this  Agreement  by giving  the
     Division  notice thereof  within ten (10) days of the Division's  notice to
     it. In addition,  the  Division  will afford the Buyer the  opportunity  to
     purchase and/or license from it, on a "last call" basis  hereunder,  any of
     the Products to be so discontinued or so changed within thirty (30) days of
     such notice.

4.5  Taxes:  The Buyer  shall bear the cost and  expense  of any taxes,  levies,
     duties and fees of any kind, nature or description whatsoever applicable to
     the Products sold and/or  licensed to it by the Division,  other than taxes
     based solely on the Division's own income derived therefrom. The Buyer will
     promptly pay to the Division all such amounts upon the Division  giving the
     Buyer notice  thereof unless the Buyer provides the Division with exemption
     certificates or licenses acceptable to the appropriate taxing authorities.

ARTICLE 5.0 THE SYSTEMS.

5.1  General:  The  Buyer  represents  to the  Division  that  all the  Products
     purchased  and/or licensed by it under this Agreement shall be incorporated
     into the Systems or be sold as  replacement  parts for the Systems and will
     only be sold to the Customers of the Systems with  significant  value added
     thereto. The Buyer will defend, indemnify and hold the Division (and/or its
     officers, directors, employees and agents) harmless from all suits, claims,
     losses and damages (including  reasonable attorneys' fees) arising from any
     claims  against  the  Division  as a result of the  Buyer's  default in the
     performance of its obligations under this Section.


5.2  Specific  Uses:  The Buyer  will not  knowingly,  sell,  lease,  license or
     distribute  the  Systems for use in  aircraft  instrumentation  or for life
     support  purposes.  In addition,  if the Buyer sells,  leases,  licenses or
     distributes the Systems for any medical purpose or application, Buyer will,
     at its own cost and expense,  obtain and maintain all approvals and permits
     required by the United States Federal Food, Drug & Cosmetic Act of 1938, as
     now in effect or hereafter  amended,  concerning  same and will not resell,
     lease,  license or distribute any of the Products in any way that will make
     them be adulterated  or misbranded  within the meaning of the Act, or be an
     article which may not be introduced  into interstate  commerce  pursuant to
     the requirements of Sections,  404, 415, 510, 513 or 515 thereof, nor be in
     violation  of any similar law or any other  jurisdiction  having  authority
     over the  manufacture,  processing and  distribution  of the Systems or the
     Products.  The Buyer will defend,  indemnify and hold the Division  (and/or
     its officers,  directors,  employees  and agents)  harmless from all suits,
     claims, losses and damages (including reasonable attorneys' fees) arising

                                        3
<PAGE>
     from any claims against the Division as a result of the Buyer's  default in
     the performance of its obligations under this Section.

5.3  Trademarks:   The  Buyer   acknowledges  the  validity  of  the  Division's
     tradenames and trademarks and that it shall have no right to or interest in
     any trade names or trademarks  owned,  used or claimed now or in the future
     by the Division or Sony Corporation (Japan) as a result of this Agreement.

5.4  Documentation  Accompanying  the  Products:  The Buyer  shall  furnish  the
     Customers for the Systems with all warranty  cards and other  documentation
     accompanying  the  Products at the time of their  delivery to the Buyer and
     will not remove any Sony trademarks,  trade names, serial numbers and other
     Sony  identification  appearing on the Products,  without the prior written
     consent of the Division.  HOWEVER,  IF THE BUYER  MODIFIES THE PRODUCTS FOR
     THE SYSTEMS, THEN IT WELL REMOVE ALL SUCH CARDS, DOCUMENTATION, TRADEMARKS,
     TRADE NAMES, SERIAL NUMBERS AND IDENTIFICATION.

ARTICLE 6.0 SHIPMENTS.

6.1  Title and Risk of Loss:  Title to all the Products  sold (but not licensed)
     by the  Division  to the  Buyer  shall  pass upon the  Division's  delivery
     thereof to the  carrier.  Risk of loss or damage to any of the  Products in
     transit,  without regard to whether the Division paid the shipping  charges
     therefor or whether any third party is designated as consignee thereof,  is
     the  Buyer's,  whose  responsibility  it will be to file  claims  with  the
     carrier.

6.2  Time of  Delivery:  Delivery  dates set  forth in any Buyer  order or other
     purchasing documents, or any confirmation thereof by the Division, shall be
     deemed to be  estimated  only and subject to the  Division's  then  current
     leadtimes for the  Products.  The Buyer will not be excused from payment of
     any amounts it owes to the Division or from the  performance  of any of its
     other obligations under the terms and conditions hereof as a result of, and
     the Division  will not be liable to the Buyer for damages  resulting  from,
     the  Division's  failure  to  meet  any of  those  dates.  However,  if the
     Division's delay in shipment or delivery of any ordered Products exceeds by
     ninety (90) days such first  estimated  date,  then either party may cancel
     any Buyer order or part  thereof  not  previously  fulfilled  by giving the
     other notice  thereof,  and without  incurring  any  liability to the other
     therefor.

6.3  Separate  Transaction:  Each Buyer order for the Products shall be deemed a
     separate transaction and each shipment of the Products by the Division will
     constitute  a separate  sale and/or  license,  obligating  the Buyer to pay
     therefor,  whether such shipment be in whole or only in partial fulfillment
     of such order.

6.4  Stop  Shipments:  The Buyer  acknowledges  that the  Division  reserves the
     right,  in its sole  discretion,  to  cancel  any Buyer  orders  previously
     accepted by the  Division or to delay the  delivery of any of the  Products
     covered thereby if the Buyer defaults in any of its obligations  under this
     Agreement or if the Division  reasonably  believes that the Buyer may do so
     for or with respect to any past or pending Buyer order.

ARTICLE 7.0 CREDIT, PAYMENT AND INDEBTEDNESS.

7.1  Maintenance  of  Credit  Line:  The  Buyer  shall  maintain  a credit  line
     sufficient  to support its purchase  and/or  license of the Products  under
     this Agreement. The Buyer will provide the Division with such statements of
     the Buyer's financial  condition as the Division may reasonably  request by
     giving the Buyer notice thereof.  The Buyer  acknowledges that the Division
     may,  from time to time,  vary,  change or limit the amount or  duration of
     credit allowed to the Buyer either

                                        4
<PAGE>
     generally or with respect to any specific  order for the Products by giving
     the Buyer notice  thereof and without  incurring any liability to the Buyer
     therefor.

7.2  Payment Term: Buyer shall pay to the Division the net purchase price of all
     Product  shipped  hereunder  within  thirty  (30)  days  after  the date of
     Division's invoice.

7.3  Unauthorized  Deductions:  The Buyer shall not make  deductions of any kind
     from any amount it owes to the  Division  unless the Buyer has  received an
     official credit  memorandum from the Division  authorizing  such deduction.
     The making of any such deduction  shall be grounds for immediate  cessation
     of further  deliveries to the Buyer and/or termination of this Agreement by
     the Division without liability of the Division therefor.

7.4  Charge for Late  Payment:  If payment is not received by the Division  when
     due,  the  Division  shall  have  the  right,  in  its  sole  and  absolute
     discretion,  to levy, in addition to the prices specified, a monthly charge
     equal  to the  lesser  of (i)  one and  one-half  percent  (1-1/2%)  of the
     invoiced   amount  for  each  month  during   which  the  payment   remains
     outstanding, including any month in which payment was due and not received,
     or (ii) the maximum allowable by law. If at any time the Buyer's account is
     subject to a finance charge  hereunder,  in addition to any other remedies,
     the Division reserves the right to stop all further shipments to the Buyer.
     Late payment shall  constitute a material breach by the Buyer hereunder and
     constitute a basis for termination of this Agreement by the Division.

7.5  Defaults: If the Buyer defaults in the payment of any amount it owes to the
     Division  when due, and if such default  continues for a period of ten (10)
     days after the Division gives the Buyer notice  thereof,  then, in addition
     to any other remedy  available to the Division  under this  Agreement or at
     law therefor,  all amounts  payable by the Buyer to the  Division,  whether
     then due or not,  shall,  in the Division's  sole  discretion,  and without
     further notice to the Buyer, become immediately due and payable.

ARTICLE 8.0 PATENT, TRADEMARK AND COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT.

8.1  Claims of Direct Infringement:  Subject to the terms and conditions of this
     Article 8.0, the  Division  warrants to the Buyer that,  to the best of the
     Division's  knowledge,  the Products as and when manufactured and delivered
     by the  Division  to the Buyer  shall be free of any  rightful  third party
     claim of direct  infringement  of any United  States  patent,  trademark or
     copyright by the Products per se.

8.2  Indemnification  by the Division:  The Division  shall, at its own cost and
     expense,  defend any claim or suit  alleging  direct  patent,  trademark or
     copyright  infringement  instituted  against the Buyer or other  affiliated
     companies  in which the Buyer has direct  ownership  (and/or its  officers,
     directors,  employees  and  agents)  but not  customers  of the Buyer,  and
     indemnify the Buyer (and/or its officers, directors,  employees and agents)
     against any award of damages and costs for direct  infringement  (including
     reasonable  attorneys'  fees)  made  against  the  Buyer by a court of last
     resort,  insofar as such award of damages is based on a final determination
     that the Products as and when  delivered by the Division to the Buyer under
     this Agreement directly infringed any patent, trademark or copyright of the
     United  States.  Indemnification  of costs  hereunder  will  extend only to
     actual costs  assessed.  This indemnity will not apply to the Products made
     by or for, or  modified by or for,  the  Division  in  accordance  with the
     Buyer's specifications or requests.

8.3  Conditions Under Which  Indemnification  Applies: The Division's obligation
     under Section 8.2 shall be conditioned  on the following:  (a) the Division
     shall be notified promptly in writing by Buyer of any notice of such claim,
     but in no event later than ten (10) days after  Buyer  shall have  received
     any notice thereof-,  (b) the Division,  in its sole  discretion,  is given
     sole control of the defense of any such claim,  suit or allegation  and all
     negotiations  for  its  settlement  or  compromise;  (c)  the  Buyer  fully
     cooperates  with the  Division in the  defense  and all related  settlement
     negotiations.  If the Products  become,  or in the  Division's  opinion are
     likely to become, the subject of such a claim,  allegation or suit then the
     Buyer permits the Division, at the Division's own cost

                                        5
<PAGE>
     and  expense but in its sole  discretion:  (1) to procure for the Buyer the
     right to continue using the affected Products; (2) to replace or modify the
     affected Products so that they become noninfringing;  or, (3) to remove the
     affected Products and refund the purchase price the Buyer paid therefor.


8.4  Exclusions:  Notwithstanding  the terms and conditions of Sections 8.1, 8.2
     and 8.3,  the  Division  shall have no  liability  to the Buyer if any such
     claim,  allegation or suit is based upon or arises out of. (a)  alterations
     of the Products by the Buyer or any third  party;  (b) failure of the Buyer
     to  use  updated  Products  provided  by the  Division  for  avoiding  such
     infringement;  (c)  use of the  Products  in  combination  with  equipment,
     software  or  products  not  furnished  by the  Division  except  for those
     expressly  approved in writing by the  Division;  (d)  processes or methods
     allegedly  performed by the Products  except  those  expressly  approved in
     writing by the  Division:  (e) use of the  Products in the manner for which
     the  same  were  neither  designed  nor  contemplated;  or,  (f) a  patent,
     trademark or copyright in which the Buyer or an affiliate or  subsidiary of
     the Buyer has a direct or indirect interest by license or otherwise.

8.5  Disclaimer  of Warranty  Against  Infringement:  THE  WARRANTY SET FORTH IN
     SECTION 8.1 IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER  WARRANTIES,  EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,  WITH
     REGARD TO ANY CLAIM OF  INFRINGEMENT  BY THE PRODUCTS.  THE DIVISION HEREBY
     DISCLAIMS  AND EXCLUDES ALL  WARRANTIES  AGAINST  INFRINGEMENT  THAT MAY BE
     PROVIDED IN SECTION  2-312(3) OF THE UNIFORM  COMMERCIAL CODE AND/OR IN ANY
     OTHER COMPARABLE STATE STATUTE.

8.6  Limitation of Liability For Infringement  Claims:  The terms and conditions
     of this Article and Article 11.0 state the entire liability of the Division
     to the Buyer for any claim arising from, or based upon, infringement of any
     third  party  intellectual  property  right  including  but not  limited to
     patent, trademark or copyright infringement.

8.7  Indemnification by the Buyer: The Buyer shall, at its own cost and expense,
     defend,  indemnify  and hold  harmless the Division  (and/or its  officers,
     directors,  employees and agents) in the same manner and to the same extent
     described  in Section 8.2 from any claim,  allegation  or suit  against the
     Division  (and/or its officers,  directors,  employees and agents) in which
     the alleged direct patent, trademark or copyright infringement arises from:
     (a) any of the Products made by or for, or modified by or for, the Division
     in accordance with the Buyer's  specifications or requests;  (b) alteration
     of the Products by the Buyer;  or, (c) from the combination of the Products
     with  equipment,  software or products not furnished by the Division except
     for those expressly approved in writing by the Division

ARTICLE 9.0 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS IN SOFTWARE.

9.1  Retention  of  Rights:  The Buyer  acknowledges  that the  Division  or, in
     applicable instances, the Division's licensor, retains the entire right and
     title in and to the  intellectual  property of any  software  the  Division
     furnishes to the Buyer  pursuant to this  Agreement.  The Buyer shall enter
     into such  agreements  as the  Division  may from time to time request as a
     condition to the Division  furnishing  the Buyer any such  software and the
     Buyer's distribution, use or modification thereof.

9.2  Software  as  Products:  Unless an  agreement  of the type  referred  to in
     Section 9.1 is entered into, the Buyer shall only license and/or distribute
     and shall not  unbundle,  offer for sale or in any way  attempt to separate
     the software the Division  furnishes to it for  distribution  as one of the
     Products,  and then  only on those  terms  and  conditions,  not  including
     license fees, as the Division  may, from time to time,  request.  The Buyer
     agrees that they will not remove any end user  license  agreement  included
     with the software and will not modify or reverse engineer the software.

9.3  Customer Licenses:  The Buyer shall obtain for and deliver to, the Division
     customer  signed  copies of any  agreements  the Division may, from time to
     time,  require the Buyer's  customer to enter into as a condition  to their
     use of any software the Division furnishes to the Buyer for distribution as
     one of the  Products.  Although the Buyer will not be  responsible  for the
     enforcement  of any such  agreements,  it will  take  such  actions  as the
     Division may from time to time reasonably request by

                                        6
<PAGE>
     giving the Buyer notice  thereof not to induce or contribute  reasonably to
     any customer's default under such an agreement.

ARTICLE 10.0 INSPECTION AND WARRANTY.

10.1 Upon receipt of shipment hereunder,  Buyer shall inspect the Products under
     such  shipment.  Claims for  shortages,  incorrect  materials  or invoicing
     errors  must be made by Buyer  within  twenty  (20) days  after  receipt of
     shipment.  Claims for  non-receipt  of shipment  must be made within twenty
     (20) days  after  receipt of  invoice.  Claims  for  defects  in  material,
     workmanship or failure to meet  specifications must be made within the time
     period specified below.

10.2 Division warrants that the Products furnished hereunder will at the time of
     shipment,  and for the period specified in Appendix 2 ("Warranty  Period"),
     be free from  defects in  material  and  workmanship  under  normal use and
     service  and  will  conform  to  Division's   applicable  standard  written
     specifications.

10.3 Should any  Product  prove  defective  by reason of  improper  material  or
     workmanship or failure to meet the specifications,  and if Buyer shall have
     so notified Division in writing within the period specified above and shall
     have specified in such notice the alleged defects and/or  failures,  and if
     such  Product  is found to  Division's  satisfaction  to be  nonconforming,
     Division  shall,  at  Division's  option,  either  repair or  replace  such
     defective  Product at Division's  cost or refund the purchase price of such
     defective  Product  within sixty (60) days after receipt of such  defective
     Product.  Division  shall not be required to remove or install any Products
     from or into Buyer's product(s) or system(s) for the purpose of such repair
     or replacement.


10.4 Notwithstanding  the above,  Division shall have no warranty,  liability or
     obligation to the Buyer with respect to any software which may be contained
     on any  media  Products;  or any  Products  which  have been  subjected  to
     operating and/or  environmental  conditions in excess of the maximum values
     therefor in the applicable  specifications or otherwise have been subjected
     to abuse,  misuse,  improper use, improper testing,  negligence,  accident,
     alteration,  tampering or faulty  repair,  such as, by way of example,  any
     Product that has been  reconfigured by Buyer; or any Product which has been
     altered,  repaired or modified  other than upon  Division's  prior  written
     approval;  or any Product  subjected  to unusual  physical,  electrical  or
     environmental stress or improper installation;  or any Product that has any
     foreign  equipment  or  component,  either  residing in Buyer's  chassis or
     connecting  to it other  than  via a  Division-supplied  interface  device,
     unless such foreign equipment or component is first removed,  and no defect
     has been induced by its  incorporation.  Nor shall this warranty  extend to
     subsequent   purchasers  or  end  users  of  Buyer's  product(s)  in  which
     Division's Products may be incorporated.

10.5 Division hereby disclaims any representations or warranty that the Products
     are or will be compatible with any  combination of non-Sony  products Buyer
     may choose to connect to the Products.  It shall be Buyer's  responsibility
     to determine for itself the suitability and  compatibility  of the Products
     in each instance.

10.6 Continued  use  or  possession  of the  Products  after  expiration  of the
     applicable  warranty period stated above shall be conclusive  evidence that
     the  warranty is fulfilled to the full  satisfaction  of Buyer.  Division's
     warranties as  hereinabove  set forth shall not be enlarged,  diminished or
     affected by, and no  obligation  or  liability  shall arise or grow out of,
     Division's  rendering of  technical  advice or service in  connection  with
     Buyer's order of the Products furnished hereunder.


10.7 THE  BUYER  ACKNOWLEDGES  THAT,  EXCEPT AS  EXPRESSLY  PROVIDED  ABOVE,  NO
     WARRANTIES  WITH  REGARD TO THE  PRODUCTS,  WHETHER OF  MERCHANTABILITY  OR
     FITNESS  FOR A  PARTICULAR  PURPOSE  OR  OTHERWISE,  ARE  CREATED  BY  THIS
     AGREEMENT  AND THE  DIVISION  HEREBY  DISCLAIMS  AND  EXCLUDES  ALL IMPLIED
     WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.

                                        7
<PAGE>
ARTICLE 11.0 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY.

     THE  LIABILITY  OF THE  DIVISION,  IF ANY, FOR DAMAGES FOR ANY CLAIM OF ANY
     KIND  WHATSOEVER  AND  REGARDLESS OF THE LEGAL  THEORY,  WITH REGARD TO ANY
     ORDER  PLACED  BY  THE  BUYER  HEREUNDER,  REGARDLESS  OF THE  DELIVERY  OR
     NON-DELIVERY  OF SUCH  PRODUCTS,  OR WITH RESPECT TO THE  PRODUCTS  COVERED
     THEREBY,  SHALL  NOT BE  GREATER  THAN  THE  ACTUAL  PURCHASE  PRICE OF THE
     PRODUCTS  WITH  RESPECT  TO WHICH  SUCH  CLAIM IS MADE.  IN NO EVENT  SHALL
     DIVISION BE LIABLE TO THE BUYER FOR SPECIAL,  INCIDENTAL,  OR CONSEQUENTIAL
     DAMAGES OF ANY KIND. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL DIVISION BE LIABLE TO THE
     BUYER FOR COMPENSATION,  REIMBURSEMENT OR DAMAGES ON ACCOUNT OF THE LOSS OF
     PRESENT OR PROSPECTIVE PROFITS,  EXPENDITURES,  INVESTMENTS OR COMMITMENTS,
     WHETHER MADE IN THE  ESTABLISHMENT,  DEVELOPMENT OR MAINTENANCE OF BUSINESS
     REPUTATION OR GOODWILL,  OR FOR LOSS OF DATA, COST OF SUBSTITUTE  PRODUCTS,
     COST OF CAPITAL, AND THE CLAIMS OF ANY THIRD PARTY, OR FOR ANY OTHER REASON
     WHATSOEVER

ARTICLE 12.0 TERM AND TERMINATION.

12.1 Term:  This  Agreement  shall become  effective as of this date first above
     written  and will  expire on April 30, 1997  unless  sooner  terminated  in
     accordance with the terms and conditions hereof.

12.2 Termination for Convenience: This Agreement may be terminated without cause
     by either party by and upon ninety (90) days prior written  notice given to
     the other  party by  registered  or  certified  mail,  in which  event this
     Agreement shall terminate on the date set forth in such notice. The date of
     mailing  said  written  notice  shall be deemed the date on which notice of
     termination of the Agreement shall have been given.


12.3 Termination  for Cause:  This  Agreement  may be terminated by either party
     upon the occurrence of any of the following,  by the aggrieved party giving
     written notice to the other party by registered or certified mail, in which
     event this Agreement shall terminate on the date set forth in such notice.:

     (a) The Buyer defaults in the payment of any amount it owes to the Division
     when due and such default continues for a period of ten (10) days after the
     Division gives the Buyer notice thereof.

     (b) If  any  proceeding  in  bankruptcy  or in  reorganization  or for  the
     appointment of a receiver or trustee or any other proceedings under any law
     for the relief of debtors shall be instituted by or against the other party
     or if the  other  party  shall  make  an  arrangement  for the  benefit  of
     creditors;

     (c) A breach by either party of any terms of this Agreement which breach is
     not remedied to the aggrieved party's  satisfaction within ten (10) days of
     the breaching party's receipt of notice of such breach

     (d) Either party engaging  directly or indirectly in any attempt to defraud
     the other party;

     (e) The  occurrence  of any of the events  referred to in Article  13.1 (a)
     through (c), or the  Buyer'sfailure to give the Division notice of an event
     referred to in Article 13.1 (a) through (c).

12.4 Remedies  for  Breach:  If the Buyer  defaults  in the  performance  of its
     obligations  under the terms and  conditions  of this  Agreement,  then the
     Division may, in addition to any other remedy  available to it hereunder or
     at law, suspend or cease further  shipments of the Products to the Buyer or
     suspend doing business with the Buyer.

12.5 Right  of  Set-Off:  If  the  Buyer  defaults  in  the  performance  of its
     obligations  under the terms and  conditions of this Agreement or any other
     agreement(s)  with any other division of Sony  Electronics  Inc.,  then the
     Division may, in addition to any other remedy  available to it hereunder or
     at law, set-

                                        8
<PAGE>
     off  any  amounts  owed to it  pursuant  to this  Agreement  or such  other
     agreements.  Upon  the  termination  of this  Agreement,  any  amounts  the
     Division  owes to the Buyer will be first  off-set  against any amounts the
     Buyer owes to the Division, or any other division of Sony Electronics Inc..

12.6 Effect on Other  Agreements:  Upon the termination of this  Agreement,  the
     Division may, in its sole discretion, terminate any/or all other agreements
     then in effect BETWEEN THE BUYER AND THE DIVISION and/or any other division
     of Sony  Electronics  Inc.  Said right of  termination  as set FORTH HEREIN
     shall be in addition to and to the extent necessary  supersede any right of
     termination which may be provided for in any of such other agreements.


12.7 Surviving   Obligations   and   Limitations:   Neither  the  expiration  or
     termination of this Agreement nor the termination of any agreement referred
     to in Section 12.6 shall  release the Buyer from its  obligation to pay any
     amount it owes to the Division or operate to discharge any liability to the
     Division incurred by the Buyer prior thereto.


12.8 Order Procedure After Notice of Termination:  During the period between the
     Division  giving the Buyer notice of default or notice of this  Agreement's
     termination and the date of cure or effective date of such termination, all
     Buyer  orders for the Products  that are accepted by the Division  shall be
     shipped to the Buyer only upon a cash with order basis.


ARTICLE 13.0 NOTICES.

13.1 The Buyer agrees to give the Division immediate notice in writing of any:

     (a)  Transaction  affecting  the  ownership of ten percent (10%) or more of
          the  Buyer's  capital  stock,  if  a  corporation;
     (b)  Change in the respective interest of the partners, if a partnership;
     (c)  Transaction affecting the ownership of any part of the business, if an
          individual proprietorship; and
     (d)  Changes in address of its headquarters or branch locations.

13.2 Any  notice  given  under  this  Agreement  shall be  deemed  to have  been
     sufficiently  given  when  sent  by  certified  or  registered  mail to the
     respective  parties  hereto  at the  address  designated  by  each  of them
     respectively in this Agreement,  or as subsequently  changed by notice duly
     given.  The date of mailing said written notice shall be deemed the date on
     which notice has been given.

ARTICLE 14.0 GENERAL.

14.1 Export:  The Buyer  represents  and warrants to the Division that the Buyer
     shall not export the  Products  covered by this  Agreement  in violation of
     U.S. export laws and regulations.  The Buyer will be solely responsible for
     compliance with and the obtaining of any required export licenses.

14.2 Assignment: The Buyer shall not assign or otherwise transfer this Agreement
     or any interest  herein or any right  hereunder to any third party  without
     the  prior  written  consent  of  the  Division,  and  any  such  purported
     assignment,  transfer or attempt to assign or transfer any interest  herein
     or right  hereunder  without the prior written consent of the Division will
     be  deemed  immediately  null,  void  and of no force  or  effect  and this
     Agreement will be deemed immediately terminated.

14.3 Waivers:  No waiver by the  Division of any default in  performance  on the
     part of the  Buyer  under  this  Agreement  or of any  breach  or series of
     breaches by the Buyer of any of the terms or conditions  of this  Agreement
     shall  constitute a waiver of any subsequent  default in performance  under
     this Agreement or any subsequent breach of any terms or conditions thereof.

                                        9
<PAGE>
14.4   Non-Exclusivity  of Remedy: Any specific right or remedy provided in this
       AGREEMENT  SHALL NOT BE  exclusive  but will be  cumulative  of all other
       rights and remedies set forth herein or allowed by law.

14.5   Litigation:  In the event of any  litigation  between  the  parties  with
       respect to this  AGREEMENT,  THE prevailing  party (the party entitled to
       recover costs of suit, at such time as all appeals HAVE BEEN exhausted or
       the time for taking  such  appeals  has  expired),  shall be  entitled to
       recover  REASONABLE  attorneys'  fees and costs in addition to such other
       relief  as  the  court  may  award.  This  provision  shall  survive  the
       expiration or termination of this Agreement.


14.6   Headings: The headings of Articles and sections in this Agreement are for
       convenience and reference only, and they shall in no way define, limit or
       describe  the scope of the  terms and  conditions  of such  Articles  and
       sections and will not be considered in the  interpretation,  construction
       or enforcement hereof.

14.7   Governing Law, Venue and Waiver of Jury Trial:  (i) This Agreement  shall
       be construed and enforced in  accordance  with the local law of the State
       of  California.  (ii) The  parties  hereby  consent  to and submit to the
       jurisdiction  of the  federal  and state  courts  located in the State of
       California,  and any action or suit under  this  Agreement  shall only be
       brought by the  parties in any  federal or state  court with  appropriate
       jurisdiction over the subject matter  established or sitting in the State
       of California.  The parties shall not raise in connection therewith,  and
       hereby waive, any defenses based upon the venue, the inconvenience of the
       forum, the lack of personal  jurisdiction,  the sufficiency of service of
       process,  or the like in any such action or suit  brought in the State of
       California. Ibis provision shall survive the expiration or termination of
       this Agreement.

14.8   Waiver of Jury Trial:  BUYER HEREBY  WAIVES ALL RIGHT OR  ENTITLEMENT  TO
       TRIAL  BY JURY IN  CONNECTION  WITH ANY  DISPUTE  THAT  ARISES  OUT OF OR
       RELATES IN ANY WAY TO THIS  AGREEMENT.  THIS PROVISION  SHALL SURVIVE THE
       EXPIRATION OR TERMINATION OF THIS AGREEMENT.

14.9   Invalidity:  If and to the  extent  that any of the terms and  conditions
       hereof are specifically determined by any court to be in whole or in part
       invalid  or  unenforceable,  this  Agreement  will be deemed  immediately
       terminated.

14.10  Government Contracts:  No term or condition required in any United States
       government contract or subcontract related thereto shall be deemed a part
       of this Agreement,  or be imposed upon or binding upon the Division,  and
       this Agreement will not be deemed an acceptance of any government term or
       condition that may be included or referred to in any Buyer order or other
       purchasing document

ARTICLE 15.0 ENTIRETY OF AGREEMENT.

       This Agreement supersedes, terminates and otherwise renders null and void
       any and all prior written and/or oral agreements entered into and between
       the parties with  respect to the  Products,  except that  nothing  herein
       contained  shall be  interpreted or construed to discharge the Buyer from
       its  obligation to pay any amount it owes to the Division or to discharge
       any  liability  to the  Division  incurred by the Buyer prior to the date
       first above written.  This  Agreement  represents  and  incorporates  the
       entire  understanding  of the parties with respect to the matters  herein
       expressly  set  forth,  and each  party  acknowledges  that  there are no
       warranties,  representations,  covenants or  understandings  of any kind,
       nature  or  description  whatsoever  made by either  party to the  other,
       except as are herein  expressly  set forth.  This  Agreement  may only be
       amended by means of a written  agreement between the parties which states
       that it is an amendment hereto.

                                       10
<PAGE>
ARTICLE 16.0 ACCEPTANCE.

       This  Agreement  shall be subject to acceptance by the Division,  through
       its execution by an authorized representative thereof


     IN WITNESS WHEREOF,  the parties have entered into this Agreement as of the
date first above written.


Component & Computer Products Group            Pacific Magtron:
Sony Electronics Inc.

By: /s/ Yasuhiro Kuga                          By: /s/ Ted Li
Yasuhiro Kuga                                     Authorized Signature
President                                      Printed Name: Ted Li
                                               Title: Managing Partner

                                       11
<PAGE>
                                   APPENDIX 1

                              PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS


THE PRODUCTS are as follows:
                  CD-ROM Drives
                  Floppy Disk Drives
                  CD-R Drives

The Systems are as follows:
                  Multi-Media Kits
                  Peripheral Subsystems

       In all events,  the Systems will consist of the Products combined with or
       incorporated into plug and play subsystems or standalone  systems in each
       case, using equipment and/or programs manufactured or developed by or for
       the Buyer.


The Customers are as follows:

       Buyer  certifies  and agrees  that the System will be leased or resold in
       the regular course of business to the customers. Buyer may not resell the
       Products to end users that are affiliated  with Buyer,  or have an equity
       interest in Buyer.




                                       12
<PAGE>
                                   APPENDIX 2

                         MINIMUM QUANTITIES AND PRICES


          Volume Level            Products      Price Per Unit
          ------------            --------      --------------

     100 units per month           CDU76S          $97.00
     100 units per month           CDU920S         $550.00
     100 units per month           CDU924S         $500.00
     100 units per month           CDU111          $85.00
     100 units per month           CDU311          $109.50
     100 units per month           MPF5201/13      $19.50


Delivery for the Products will be FOB:  Division's shipping location.

Minimum per-shipment quantity           100 units per product type

The warranty period applicable to
 each of the Products is:               one year from date of invoice.

Current minimum lead time:              90 days from receipt of order.


The prices to be initially charged the Buyer will be those designated for Volume
Levels  indicated  above.  If the Buyer does not  purchase for delivery at least
thirty percent (30%) of its applicable  Volume Level in the first six (6) months
of this Agreement,  the Division will increase such price, for the remainder 'of
the Agreement term, to the price contained in the Division's then current volume
price list which  pertains to the  prorated  Volume Level at which the Buyer has
actually purchased.


If,  at the end of the first six (6)  months  of this  Agreement,  the Buyer has
purchased  for  delivery  more than one  hundred  twenty  percent  (120%) of the
semiannual  prorated  portion of its maximum initial Volume Level,  then it may,
with Division's approval, purchase Products at the next higher applicable Volume
Level for the  remaining  term of the  Agreement.  If, at the end of the term of
this  Agreement,  Buyer's  purchases  exceed the agreed upon Volume Levels,  the
Division will issue a credit for the difference in the prices paid and the price
which would have been paid at the higher Volumes actually  achieved.  Subject to
Section 12.5, any such credit will be issued in the form of a credit  memorandum
by the Division to the Buyer.

                                       13

              Logitech OEM Distribution and Installation Agreement

This agreement ("Agreement") is entered into as of the 26th day of March 1997,
between Pacific Magtron, a Corp. having its principal place of business at 1600
California Cir, ("Buyer") and Logitech, Inc., having its principal place of
business at 8505 Kaiser Drive, Fremont, CA 94555 ("Logitech").

1. DEFINITIONS
"Product" of "Products" shall mean Logitech's computer peripherals and related
software, including, but not limited to, computer mice, trackballs, touchpads,
joysticks, scanners and digital video cameras, and software therefore. "Computer
Hardware" shall be defined to be an assembled computer system which includes at
a minimum a motherboard with CPU, hard disk drive, power supply and case. BUYER
agrees that it defines its business to be in Hardware manufacturing, system
assembling, motherboard or bare-bones system distribution or reselling.

2. USE OF PRODUCTS
Logitech hereby grants BUYER a non-exclusive right to use, install, integrate
and resell Products for use with any BUYER Computer Hardware. BUYER shall
require all persons and entities in its distribution channels to comply with the
foregoing restriction. Product and Product Packaging may not be modified,
altered, repackaged, reassembled or supplemented in any way. BUYER shall not
advertise or otherwise market the Product(s) as separate items, but shall
clearly indicate in all marketing materials that the Product(s) are available
only as an indivisible part of the Computer Hardware. Buyer shall not publish or
otherwise disclose separate prices for the Product(s), but shall price the
Computer Hardware with the Product(s) at a single indivisible unit. No license
is given or implied to reproduce any Logitech software or to distribute, license
or sell as a separate item any software which is part of the Product. BUYER
agrees that it will not export or re-export Product(s) to any country, person,
entity or end user outside of the United States, Canada and Latin America.

3. WARRANTY
a) LIMITED WARRANTY: Logitech warrants that all Products delivered under this
Agreement will be free from defects in materials or workmanship and will perform
for a period of twelve (12) months from the date of manufacture by Logitech.
This warranty shall include parts and labor and shall apply to any Product which
is or becomes defective during the applicable warranty period and is returned to
Logitech, freight prepaid. Logitech will repair or replace, at its option and
without charge to Buyer. LOGITECH MAKES NO OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
EITHER IN FACT OR BY OPERATION OF LAW, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, AND EXPRESSLY
EXCLUDES AND DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARISING FROM THE COURSE OF DEALINGS BETWEEN THE PARTIES
AND/OR FROM USAGE OF TRADE. b) RETURN POLICY No products shall be returned to
Logitech except in conformance with the Logitech standard return policy. Only
defective products may be returned. Logitech shall be under no obligation to
accept any Products returned by BUYER unless BUYER shall have first contacted
Logitech, described the nature of the problem, obtained a Returned Material
Authorization (RMA) number and shipped the Products to Logitech in shipping
containers suitable for protection of the Products, with the RMA number
conspicuously displayed on the outside of the shipping carton. All products
returned to Logitech shall be returned by BUYER at BUYER'S expense.

4. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
IN NO EVENT SHALL EITHER PARTY BE LIABLE FOR COSTS OF PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
PRODUCTS OR SERVICES, LOST PROFITS, OR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING IN
ANY WAY OUT OF THE SALE, TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT, BREACH OF WARRANTY AND/OR
AGREEMENT TO SELL BUYER PRODUCTS OR SERVICES. This LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN
IF A PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, AND
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY FAILURE OF ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OF ANY LIMITED REMEDY.

5. OTHER TERMS
TERM AND TERMINATION. This Agreement shall become effective as of the date it is
signed by both parties and shall automatically renew every April 1 unless a
Party, in its sole discretion, elects, upon thirty (30) days written notice, to
not renew the Agreement. During the term of this Agreement, either party may
terminate this Agreement for its convenience upon thirty (30) days written
notice and Logitech may terminate this Agreement immediately if Buyer becomes
insolvent or engages in any illegal and/or unethical practices. INDEPENDENT
CONTRACTORS. The Parties are independent contractors with respect to each other,
and not agents of each other, and Buyer has no authority to bind Logitech.
CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION. The terms and conditions of this Agreement constitute
Logitech confidential information and shall not be disclosed by Buyer to third
parties. INDEMNIFICATION. Buyer, upon Logitech's request, shall indemnify
Logitech for all costs, fees and damages incurred by Logitech and its affiliates
that arise from Buyer and its customers' acts and omissions. ENTIRE AGREEMENT
AND APPLICABLE LAW. The terms and conditions in this Agreement constitute the
entire and final agreement between Logitech and Buyer regarding the purchase and
sale of the goods or services from Logitech. Any and all representations,
promises, warranties or statements by Logitech agents that differ in any way
from the terms of this Agreement shall be given no force or effect. This
Agreement may only be modified in writing signed by both parties' authorized
representatives. Any suit hereunder shall be brought in the federal or state
courts in the districts which include Fremont, California, and Buyer hereby
agrees and submits to the personal jurisdiction and venue thereof. This
Agreement shall be governed by construed in accordance with the laws of the
State of California, without regard to any provision concerning the
applicability of the laws of other jurisdictions.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have caused this Agreement to be executed by
their duly authorized representatives.

LOGITECH, INC.                                        BUYER
/s/ Dan McConnaughey                                  /s/ Eddie Shen
- ------------------------                              -------------------
Dan McConnaughey 4/4/97                               Eddie Shen

                                   TERM NOTE

$2,5OO,000.00                                              Palo Alto, California
                                                           February 4, 1997

         FOR   VALUE   RECEIVED,   the   undersigned   PACIFIC   MAGTROM,   INC.
(collectively,  "Borrower")  promises  to pay to the order of WELLS  FARGO BANK,
NATIONAL  ASSOCIATION  ("Bank") at its office at Peninsula  RCBO,  4-00 Hamilton
Avenue, Palo Alto,  California,  or at such other place as the holder hereof may
designate,  in lawful money of the United  States of America and in  immediately
available  funds, the principal sum of Two Million Five Hundred Thousand Dollars
($2,500,000.00), with interest thereon (computed on the basis of a 360-day year,
actual days elapsed) at a fixed rate per annum  determined by Bank to be two and
one-half  percent  (2.50%) above Bank's LIBOR in effect on the first day of each
Fixed Rate Term.

A. DEFINITIONS:

          As used herein,  the following terms shall have the meanings set forth
after each:

         1."Business  Day" means any day except a Saturday,  Sunday or any other
day designated as a holiday under Federal or California statute or regulation.

         2."Fixed  Rate  Term"  means  a  period   commencing  on  the  date  of
disbursement and continuing for three (3) months and each consecutive  three (3)
months period thereafter,  during which all of the OUTSTANDING PRINCIPAL balance
of this Note bears interest  determined  in-relation  to Bank's LIBOR;  provided
however, that no Fixed Rate Term shall extend beyond the scheduled maturity date
hereof.  If any Fixed Rate Term would end on a day which is not a Business  Day,
then such Fixed Rate Term shall be extended to the next succeeding Business Day.

         3."LIBOR" means the rate per annum (rounded  upward,  if necessary,  to
the nearest whole 1/8 of 1%) and determined pursuant to the following formula:

               LIBOR = BASE LIBOR
                    ---------------------------------
                      100% - LIBOR Reserve Percentage

         (a)"Base  LIBOR"  means  the rate per annum for  United  States  dollar
deposits  quoted  by  Bank as the  Inter-Bank  Market  Offered  Rate,  with  the
understanding  that such rate is quoted by Bank for the  purpose of  calculating
effective rates of interest for loans making reference thereto, on the first day
of a Fixed  Rate  Term for  delivery  of funds on said date for a period of time
approximately  equal to the  number  of days in such  Fixed  Rate Term and in an
amount approximately equal to the principal amount to which such Fixed Rate Term
applies. Borrower understands and agrees that Bank may base its quotation of the
Inter-Bank Market
<PAGE>
Offered  Rate upon such  offers or other  market  indicators  of the  Inter-Bank
Market as Bank in its discretion deems  appropriate  including,  but not limited
to, the rate offered for U.S. dollar deposits on the London Inter-Bank Market.

         (b) "LIBOR Reserve Percentage" means the reserve percentage  prescribed
by the Board of Governors of the Federal  Reserve  System (or any successor) for
"Eurocurrency  Liabilities"  (as defined in Regulation D of the Federal  Reserve
Board,  as  amended),  adjusted  by Bank for  expected  changes in such  reserve
percentage during the applicable Fixed Rate Term.

         4. "Successor Rate" means a rate of interest, determined by Bank in its
sole discretion, such that Bank shall receive an equivalent financial return had
LIBOR remained available or ascertainable throughout the term of this Note.

B. INTEREST:

         1. PAYMENT OF INTEREST.  Interest accrued on this Note shall be payable
on the first day of each month, commencing April 1, 1997.

         2. ADDITIONAL LIBOR PROVISIONS.

         (a) If Bank at any time shall  determine  that for any reason  adequate
and reasonable means do not exist for ascertaining Bank's LIBOR, then Bank shall
promptly give notice thereof to Borrower. If such notice is given and until such
notice has been withdrawn by Bank,  then (i) no new LIBOR option may be selected
by Borrower,  and, (ii) any portion of the outstanding  principal balance hereof
which bears interest  determined in relation to Bank's LIBOR,  subsequent to the
end of the Fixed Rate Term applicable thereto, shall bear interest determined in
relation to the Successor Rate.

         (b) If any law, treaty, rule, regulation or determination of a court or
governmental  authority  or  any  change  therein  or in the  interpretation  or
application  thereof  (each,  a "Change in Law") shall make it unlawful for Bank
(i) to make LIBOR  options  available  hereunder,  or (ii) to maintain  interest
rates based on Bank's LIBOR, then in the former event, any obligation of Bank to
make available such unlawful LIBOR options shall  immediately be cancelled,  and
in  the  latter  event,  any  such  unlawful  LIBOR-based  interest  rates  then
outstanding  shall be  converted,  at Bank's  option,  so that  interest  on the
portion of the  outstanding  principal  balance subject thereto is determined in
relation to the Prime  Rate;  provided  however,  that if any such Change in Law
shall  permit  any  LIBOR-based  interest  rates to remain  in effect  until the
expiration  of the  Fixed  Rate Term  applicable  thereto,  then such  permitted
LIBOR-based interest rates shall continue in effect until the expiration of such
Fixed Rate Term.  Upon the occurrence of any of the foregoing  events,  Borrower
shall pay to Bank immediately upon demand such amounts as may be necessary to

                                      -2-
<PAGE>
compensate Bank for any fines, fees, charges,  penalties or other costs incurred
or payable by Bank as a result thereof and which are  attributable  to any LIBOR
options made available to Borrower hereunder, and any reasonable allocation made
by Bank among its operations shall be conclusive and binding upon Borrower.

         (c) IF any  Change in Law or  compliance  by Bank with any  request  or
directive  (whether  or not  having the force of law) from any  central  bank or
other governmental authority shall:

          (i) subject Bank to any tax,  duty or other charge with respect to any
     LIBOR  options,  or change the basis of  taxation  of  payments  to Bank of
     principal, interest, fees or any other amount payable hereunder (except for
     changes in the rate of tax on the overall net income of Bank); or

          (ii) impose, modify or hold applicable any reserve-,  special deposit,
     compulsory loan or similar  requirement against assets held by, deposits or
     other  liabilities  in or for the account of,  advances or loans by, or any
     other acquisition of funds by any office of Bank; or


          (iii) impose on Bank any other condition;

and the  result  of any of the  foregoing  is to  increase  the  cost to Bank of
making, renewing or maintaining any LIBOR options hereunder and/or to reduce any
amount  receivable  by Bank in  connection  therewith,  then in any  such  case,
Borrower  shall pay to Bank  immediately  upon  demand  such  amounts  as may be
necessary to compensate  Bank for any  additional  costs incurred by Bank and/or
reductions  in amounts  received  by Bank which are  attributable-to  such LIBOR
options.  In  determining  which costs  incurred by Bank  and/or  reductions  in
amounts received by Bank are attributable to any LIBOR options made available to
Borrower hereunder,  any reasonable allocation made by Bank among its operations
shall be conclusive and binding upon Borrower.

         3. DEFAULT INTEREST.  From and after the maturity date of this Note, or
such earlier date as all principal  owing  hereunder  becomes due and payable by
acceleration or otherwise,  the outstanding principal balance of this Note shall
bear interest until paid in full at an increased rate per annum (computed on the
basis of a 360-day year,  actual days elapsed)  equal to four percent (4%) above
the rate of interest from time to time applicable to this Note.


C . REPAYMENT AND PREPAYMENT:

         1.  REPAYMENT.  Principal  shall be payable in monthly  installments as
follows:

                                      -3-
<PAGE>

         (a) One  Thousand Two Hundred  Eighty-five  Dollars  ($1,285.00)  each,
commencing  on April 1,  1997 and  continuing  on the  first  day of each  month
thereafter until and including March 1, 1998;

         (b)  One  Thousand  Four  Hundred  Fifteen  Dollars  ($1,415.00)  each,
commencing  on April 1,  1998 and  continuing  on the  first  day of each  month
thereafter until and including March 1, 1999;

         (c)  One  Thousand  Five  Hundred  Fifty  Dollars   ($1,550.00)   each,
commencing  on April 1,  1999 and  continuing  on the  first  day of each  month
thereafter until and including March 1, 2000;

         (d)  One  Thousand  Seven  Hundred  Five  Dollars   ($1,705.00)   each,
commencing  on April 1,  2000 and  continuing  on the  first  day of each  month
thereafter until and including March 1, 2001;

         (e) One Thousand Eight Hundred  Seventy-five  Dollars ($1,875.00) each,
commencing  on April 1,  2001 and  continuing  on the  first  day of each  month
thereafter until and including March 1, 2002;

         (f) Two Thousand Sixty Dollars ($2,060.00) each, commencing on April 1,
2002  and  continuing  on the  first  day of each  month  thereafter  until  and
including March 1, 2003;

         (g) Two  Thousand  Two Hundred  Sixty-five  Dollars  ($2,265.00)  each,
commencing  on April 1,  2003 and  continuing  on the  first  day of each  month
thereafter until and including March 1, 2004;

         (h)  Two  Thousand  Four  Hundred  Ninety  Dollars   ($2,490.00)  each,
commencing  on April 1,  2004 and  continuing  on the  first  day of each  month
thereafter until and including March 1, 2005.

         (i)  Two  Thousand  Seven  Hundred  Forty  Dollars   ($2,740.00)  each,
commencing  on April 1,  2005 and  continuing  on the  first  day of each  month
thereafter until and including March 1, 2006;

         (j) Three Thousand Ten Dollars ($3,010.00) each, commencing on April 1,
2006 and  continuing  on the  first  day of each  month  .thereafter  until  and
including March 1, 2007;

         All  remaining  unpaid  principal  and any accrued and unpaid  interest
shall be due and payable in full on March 1, 2007.

         2.  APPLICATION  OF  PAYMENTS.  Each payment made on this Note shall be
credited  first,  to any  interest  then  due  and  second,  to the  outstanding
principal balance hereof.

         3.  PREPAYMENT  Borrower may prepay  principal on this Note at any time
and  in the  minimum  amount  of One  Hundred  Thousand  Dollars  ($100,000.00);
provided however, that if the outstanding principal balance of this Note is less
than said amount,  the minimum prepayment amount shall be the entire outstanding
principal  balance  thereof.  In consideration of Bank providing this prepayment
option to  Borrower,  or if this Note shall  become due and  payable at any time
prior to the last day of the Fixed

                                      -4-
<PAGE>
Rate Term applicable thereto by acceleration or otherwise, Borrower shall pay to
Bank  immediately  upon demand a fee which is the sum of the discounted  monthly
differences  for each month from the month of  prepayment  through  the month in
which such Fixed Rate Term matures, calculated as follows for each such month:

        (i)     DETERMINE  the amount of interest  which would have accrued each
                month on the amount  prepaid at the interest rate  applicable to
                such  amount had it remained  outstanding  until the last day of
                the Fixed Rate Term applicable thereto.

        (ii)    SUBTRACT  from the amount  determined in (i) above the amount of
                interest  which  would  have  accrued  for the same month on the
                amount prepaid for the remaining term of such Fixed Rate Term at
                Bank's LIBOR in effect on the date of  prepayment  for new loans
                made for such term and in a principal amount equal to the amount
                prepaid.


        (iii)   If the result  obtained  in (ii) for any month is  greater  than
                zero,  discount  that  difference  by Bank's  LIBOR used in (ii)
                above.

Each  Borrower  acknowledges  that  prepayment of such amount may result in Bank
incurring  additional  costs,  expenses  and/or  liabilities,  and  that  it  is
difficult  to  ascertain  the  full  extent  of  such  costs,   expenses  and/or
liabilities.  Each  Borrower,  therefore,  agrees  to  pay  the  above-described
prepayment fee and agrees that said amount  represents a reasonable  estimate of
the prepayment costs,  expenses and/or liabilities of Bank. if Borrower fails to
pay any  prepayment  fee when  due,  the  amount  of such  prepayment  fee shall
thereafter  bear  interest  until paid at a rate per annum two  percent  (2.00%)
above the Prime  Rate in effect  from time to time  (computed  on the basis of a
360-day year, actual days elapsed).

         (c) APPLICATION OF  PREPAYMENTS.  All prepayments of principal shall be
applied on the most remote principal. installment or installments then unpaid.

D. EVENTS OF DEFAULT:

         The  occurrence of any of the following  shall  constitute an "Event of
Default" under this Note:

         1. The failure to pay any  principal,  interest,  fees or other charges
when due  hereunder or under any contract,  instrument  or document  executed in
connection with this Note.

         2. The filing of a petition by or against any  Borrower,  any guarantor
of this Note or any general partner or joint venturer in any Borrower which is a
partnership or a joint venture (with each such guarantor, general partner and/or
joint  venturer  referred  to  herein  as a "Third  Party  Obligor")  under  any
provisions of the Bankruptcy Reform Act, Title 11 of the United

                                      -5-
<PAGE>
States Code, as amended or recodified from time to time, or under any similar or
other law relating to bankruptcy, insolvency, reorganization or other relief for
debtors; the appointment of a receiver,  trustee,  custodian or liquidator of or
for any part of the assets or property of any  Borrower or Third Party  Obligor;
any  Borrower  or  Third  Party  Obligor  becomes  insolvent,  makes  a  general
assignment  for the benefit of creditors or is generally not paving its debts as
they become due; or any  attachment or like levy on any property of any Borrower
or Third Party Obligor.

         3. The death or  incapacity of any  individual  Borrower or Third Party
Obligor,  or the  dissolution  or  liquidation  of any  Borrower  or Third Party
Obligor  which is a  corporation,  partnership,  joint  venture or other type of
entity.

         4. Any default in the payment or performance of any obligation,  or any
defined event of default,  under any  provisions of any contract,  instrument or
document  pursuant to which any Borrower or Third Party Obligor has incurred any
obligation for borrowed money, any purchase  obligation,  or any other liability
of any kind to any person or entity, including the holder.

         5. Any  financial  statement  provided  by any  Borrower or Third Party
Obligor to Bank proves false.

         6. Any sale or transfer of all or a substantial or material part of the
assets of any Borrower or Third Party Obligor other than in the ordinary  course
of its business.

         7. Any violation or breach of any provision of, or any defined event of
default  under,  any  addendum  to this  Note or any loan  agreement,  guaranty,
security agreement,  deed of trust or other document executed in connection with
or securing this Note.

E. MISCELLANEOUS:

         1.  REMEDIES.  Upon the sale,  transfer,  hypothecation,  assignment or
other encumbrance, whether voluntary, involuntary or by operation of law, of all
or any interest in the property  described  in any deed of trust  securing  this
Note, or the occurrence of any Event of Default, the holder of this Note, at the
holder's  option,  may declare all sums of principal  and  interest  outstanding
hereunder to be immediately due and payable without presentment, demand, protest
or notice of dishonor, all of which are expressly waived by each Borrower.  Each
Borrower shall pay to the holder  immediately upon demand the full amount of all
payments, advances, charges, costs and expenses, including reasonable attorneys'
fees (to include  outside  counsel fees and all allocated  costs of the holder's
in-house counsel),  incurred by the holder in connection with the enforcement of
the holder's rights and/or the collection of any amounts which become due to the
holder under this Note, and the  prosecution or defense of any action in any way
related to this Note,  including without limitation,  any action for declaratory
relief, and including any

                                      -6-
<PAGE>
of the foregoing incurred in connection with any bankruptcy  proceeding relating
to any Borrower.

         2. OBLIGATIONS JOINT AND SEVERAL. Should more than one person or entity
sign this Note as a Borrower,  the  obligations  of each such Borrower  shall be
joint and several.

         3.  GOVERNING  LAW.  This Note shall be  governed by and  construed  in
accordance  with the laws of the State of California,  except to the extent Bank
has greater rights or remedies under Federal law,  whether as a national bank or
otherwise,  in which case such choice of  California  law shall not be deemed to
deprive Bank of any such rights and remedies as may be available  under  Federal
law

         This Note is secured by a Deed of Trust dated February 4, 1997.

         See Addendum to Promissory Note attached hereto, all terms of which are
incorporated herein by this reference.


Pacific Magtron, Inc.

By: /s/ Theodore S. Li
   ----------------------
   Theodore S. Li
   Managing Director


                                      -7-
<PAGE>
ADDENDUM TO PROMISSORY NOTE

         THIS ADDENDUM is attached to and made a part of that certain promissory
note executed by PACIFIC MAGTRON,  INC.  ("Borrower") and payable to WELLS FARGO
BANK, NATIONAL ASSOCIATION  ("Bank"), or order, dated as of February 4, 1997, in
the   principal   amount  of  Two  Million   Five   Hundred   Thousand   Dollars
($2,500,000.00) (the "Note").

         The following provisions are hereby incorporated into the Note:

                1. So long  as  Bank  remains  committed  to  extend  credit  to
        Borrower under this Note and until payment in full of all obligations of
        Borrower hereunder, Borrower shall provide to Bank all of the following,
        in form and detail satisfactory to Bank:

                (a)  not  later  than 90  days  after  and as of the end of each
        fiscal year, a reviewed financial  statement of Borrower,  prepared by a
        certified  public  accountant  acceptable  to Bank,  to include  balance
        sheet,  income  statement and statement of cash flow,  together with all
        supporting schedules and footnotes;


                (b)  not  later  than 30  days  after  and as of the end of each
        fiscal quarter, a financial statement of Borrower, prepared by Borrower,
        to include balance sheet and income statement; and

                (c)  not  later  than 45  days  after  and as of the end of each
        calendar  year,  a  financial  statement  of each  guarantor  hereunder,
        prepared  by  such  guarantor,  to  include  balance  sheet  and  income
        statement,  and within 15 days after filing,  but in no event later than
        each October 31, copies of each such  guarantor's  filed federal  income
        tax returns for such year;


                (d) from time to time such  financial and other  information  as
        Bank may reasonably request.

                2.  FINANCIAL  CONDITION.  Borrower  shall  maintain  Borrower's
        financial  condition  as follows  using  generally  accepted  accounting
        principles   consistently  applied  and  used  consistently  with  prior
        practices (except to the extent modified by the definitions herein):


                (a) Total  Liabilities  divided by Tangible Net Worth not at any
        time greater than 2.5 to 1.0,  with "Total  Liabilities"  defined as the
        aggregate of current
<PAGE>
        liabilities and non-current liabilities less subordinated debt, and with
        "Tangible  Net Worth"  defined as the  aggregate of total  stockholders'
        equity plus subordinated debt less any intangible assets.

                (b) Net  income  after  taxes not less  than  $1.00 on an annual
        basis,  determined  as of each  fiscal  year end,  with no more than two
        consecutive quarterly losses in any fiscal year.

                (c) EBITDA  Coverage  Ratio not less than 1.25 to 1.0 as of each
        fiscal year end,  with  "EBITDA"  defined as net profit  before tax plus
        interest  expense (net of capitalized  interest  expense),  depreciation
        expense and  amortization  expense,  and with  "EBITDA  Coverage  Ratio"
        defined as EBITDA  divided by the  aggregate of total  interest  expense
        plus the prior period  current  maturity of long-term debt and the prior
        period current maturity of subordinated debt.

         3. ARBITRATION:

                (a) ARBITRATION. Upon the demand of any party, any Dispute shall
        be resolved by binding arbitration (except as set forth in (e) below) in
        accordance  with the terms of this  Note.  A  "Dispute"  shall  mean any
        action,  dispute,  claim or controversy of any kind, whether in contract
        or tort,  statutory or common law,  legal or equitable,  now existing or
        hereafter  arising under or in connection with, or in any way pertaining
        to, this Note and each other document,  contract and instrument required
        hereby or now or  hereafter  delivered  to Bank in  connection  herewith
        (collectively,   the  "Documents"),  or  any  past,  present  or  future
        extensions of credit and other  activities,  transactions or obligations
        of any kind  related  directly or  indirectly  to any of the  Documents,
        including  without   limitation  ,  any  of  the  foregoing  arising  in
        connection  with  the  exercise  of any  self-help,  ancillary  or other
        remedies  pursuant  to any of the  Documents.  Any party may by  summary
        proceedings bring an action in court to compel arbitration of a Dispute.
        Any party who fails or  refuses  to submit to  arbitration  following  a
        lawful  demand  by any other  party  shall  bear all costs and  expenses
        incurred by such other party in compelling arbitration of any Dispute.

                (b)   GOVERNING   RULES.   Arbitration   proceedings   shall  be
        administered  by the American  Arbitration  Association  ("AAA") or such
        other  administrator  as  the  parties  shall  mutually  agree  upon  in
        accordance with the AAA Commercial Arbitration Rules. All Disputes

                                      -2-
<PAGE>
        submitted  to  arbitration  shall be  resolved  in  accordance  with the
        Federal   Arbitration   Act  (Title  9  of  the  United   States  Code),
        notwithstanding  any  conflicting  choice of law provision in any of the
        Documents.   The  arbitration  shall  be  conducted  at  a  location  in
        California selected by the AAA or other  administrator.  If there is any
        inconsistency between the terms hereof and any such rules, the terms and
        procedures  set forth herein shall  control.  All statutes of limitation
        applicable to any Dispute shall apply to any arbitration proceeding. All
        discovery  activities  shall be  expressly  limited to matters  directly
        relevant  to the  Dispute  being  arbitrated.  Judgment  upon any  award
        rendered  in  an  arbitration   may  be  entered  in  any  court  having
        jurisdiction;  provided however,  that nothing contained herein shall be
        deemed  to be a waiver by any  party  that is a bank of the  protections
        afforded  to it under 12 U.S.C.  ss.91 or any similar  applicable  state
        law.

                (c) NO WAIVER; PROVISIONAL REMEDIES,  SELF-HELP AND FORECLOSURE.
        No  provision  hereof  shall  limit the  right of any party to  exercise
        self-help  remedies such as setoff,  foreclosure  against or sale of any
        real  or  personal  property  collateral  or  security,   or  to  obtain
        provisional  or  ancillary   remedies,   including  without   limitation
        injunctive  relief,  sequestration,   attachment,   garnishment  or  the
        appointment  of a  receiver,  from a  court  of  competent  jurisdiction
        before,  after  or  during  the  pendency  of any  arbitration  or other
        proceeding. The exercise of any such remedy shall not waive the right of
        any party to compel arbitration or reference hereunder.

                (d) ARBITRATOR  QUALIFICATIONS AND POWERS;  AWARDS.  Arbitrators
        must be active members of the California  State Bar or retired judges of
        the state or federal  judiciary  of  California,  with  expertise in the
        substantive  law  applicable  to the  subject  matter  of  the  Dispute.
        Arbitrators  are  empowered  to resolve  Disputes by summary  rulings in
        response  to  motions  filed  prior to the  final  arbitration  hearing.
        Arbitrators  (i) shall  resolve  all  Disputes  in  accordance  with the
        substantive law of the state of California, (ii) may grant any remedy or
        relief  that a court of the  state of  California  could  order or grant
        within the scope  hereof and such  ancillary  relief as is  necessary to
        make  effective  any  award,  and  (iii)  shall  have the power to award
        recovery  of all costs and fees,  to impose  sanctions  and to take such
        other  actions as they deem  necessary  to the same extent a judge could
        pursuant to the Federal Rules of Civil Procedure, the California

                                      -3-
<PAGE>
        Rules of Civil  Procedure or other  applicable law. Any Dispute in which
        the amount in  controversy  is  $5,000,000 or less shall be decided by a
        single  arbitrator  who  shall  not  render  an  award of  greater  than
        $5,000,000 (including damages,  costs, fees and expenses). By submission
        to a single  arbitrator,  each party expressly waives any right or claim
        to  recover  more than  $5,000,000.  Any  Dispute in which the amount in
        controversy  exceeds  $5,000,000  shall be decided by majority vote of a
        panel of three arbitrators; provided however, that all three arbitrators
        must actively participate in all hearings and deliberations.

                (e)  JUDICIAL  REVIEW.  Notwithstanding  anything  herein to the
        contrary,  in any arbitration in which the amount in controversy exceeds
        $25,000,000, the arbitrators shall be required to make specific, written
        findings of fact and  conclusions of law. In such  arbitrations  (A) the
        arbitrators  shall  not have the  power to make any  award  which is not
        supported by substantial  evidence or which is based on legal error, (B)
        an award shall not be binding  upon the parties  unless the  findings of
        fact are supported by  substantial  evidence and the  conclusions of law
        are not erroneous  under the substantive law of the state of California,
        and (C) the parties shall have in addition to the grounds referred to in
        the Federal  Arbitration  Act for  vacating,  modifying or correcting an
        award the right to judicial  review of (1) whether the  findings of fact
        rendered by the arbitrators are supported by substantial  evidence,  and
        (2) whether the  conclusions of law are erroneous  under the substantive
        law of the state of California.  Judgment  confirming an award in such a
        proceeding  may be  entered  only if a court  determines  the  award  is
        supported by substantial evidence and not based on legal error under the
        substantive law of the state of California.

                (f)   REAL    PROPERTY    COLLATERAL;    JUDICIAL    -REFERENCE.
        Notwithstanding  anything  herein to the  contrary,  no Dispute shall be
        submitted to arbitration if the Dispute  concerns  indebtedness  secured
        directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by any real property unless
        (i) the holder of the mortgage,  lien or security interest  specifically
        elects in writing to proceed with the  arbitration,  or (ii) all parties
        to the  arbitration  waive any rights or benefits  that might  accrue to
        them by virtue of the single action rule statute of California,  thereby
        agreeing that all indebtedness  and obligations of the parties,  and all
        mortgages,  liens and security  interests securing such indebtedness and
        obligations, shall remain fully valid and enforceable.


                                      -4-
<PAGE>
        If any such Dispute is not submitted to  arbitration,  the Dispute shall
        be referred to a referee in  accordance  with  California  Code of Civil
        Procedure Section 638 et seq., and this general  reference  agreement is
        intended to be specifically  enforceable in accordance with said Section
        638. A referee with the  qualifications  required herein for arbitrators
        shall be selected pursuant to the AAA's selection  procedures.  Judgment
        upon the decision rendered by a referee shall be entered in the court in
        which such  proceeding was commenced in accordance  with California Code
        of Civil Procedure Sections 644 and 645.

                (g) MISCELLANEOUS.  To the maximum extent practicable,  the AAA,
        the  arbitrators  and the  parties  shall  take all action  required  to
        conclude any arbitration proceeding within 180 days of the filing of the
        Dispute  with the AAA. No  arbitrator  or other party to an  arbitration
        proceeding  may  disclose  the  existence,  content or results  thereof,
        except  for  disclosures  of  information  by a  party  required  in the
        ordinary course of its business, by applicable law or regulation,  or to
        the extent  necessary to exercise any judicial  review  rights set forth
        herein.  If more than one  agreement for  arbitration  by or between the
        parties potentially applies to a Dispute, the arbitration provision most
        directly  related to the Documents or the subject  matter of the Dispute
        shall  control.  This Note may be  amended or  modified  only in writing
        signed by Bank and Borrower. If any provision of this Note shall be held
        to be  prohibited  by or invalid under  applicable  law, such  provision
        shall  be  ineffective  only  to  the  extent  of  such  prohibition  or
        invalidity,  without invalidating the remainder of such provision or any
        remaining  provisions of this Note.  This  arbitration  provision  shall
        survive termination,  amendment or expiration of any of the Documents or
        any relationship between the parties.


         IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this Addendum has been executed as of the same date
as the Note.

Pacific Magtron Inc

By: /s/ Theodore S. Li
   ----------------------
   Theodore S. Li
   Managing Director

                           SERVICING AGENT AGREEMENT

SBA LOAN NUMBER                                           SBA OFFICE NAME

CDC 942 585 30 03 CA                                      San Francisco District
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
BORROWER'S NAME(S)

PACIFIC MAGTRON, INC., a California corporation
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
NAME TO APPEAR ON COLSON REPORTS TO THE CDC (IF DIFFERENT)

PACIFIC MAGTRON, INC., a California corporation
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
BORROWER'S STREET ADDRESS                                       CITY/STATE/ZIP

1524 California Circle                                        Milpitas, CA 95035
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TAXPAYER 10 NO. (MUST BE 9 DIGITS)

77-0228715 (Pacific Magtron, Inc.)
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SMALL BUSINESS CONCERN (SBC) NAME (IF DIFFERENT FROM BORROWER)

- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SBC STREET ADDRESS (IF DIFFERENT FROM BORROWER ADDRESS)         CITY/STATE/ZIP

- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CERTIFIED DEVELOPMENT COMPANY                                      CDC No.

  The Mortgage Capital Development Corporation                     09655
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CENTRAL SERVICING AGENT

Colson Services Corp., 504 Loan Department
150 Nassau Street, New York, NY 10038
- --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
This  Agreement is made by the parties hereto  pursuant to the Master  Servicing
Agent  Agreement  ("MSAA")  dated  1-1-95 ,  between  the U. S.  Small  Business
Administration ("SBA') and Colson Services Corp. (-Central Servicing Agent-). In
the event that SBA shall name a successor  Central Servicing Agent Pursuant to a
new MSAA.  such  Agreement  shall  provide that such  successor  undertakes  the
obligations  and  succeeds  to the  rights of Colson  Services  Corp.  under the
Agreement on the same terms as stated herein.  The Borrower and the CDC agree in
that event to the  substitution  of the successor  Central  Servicing  Agent for
Colson  Services  Corp. in this Agreement as if such successor were named herein
and a signatory hereto.

NOTE TO SBA DISTRICT OFFICE.  SEND THIS AGREEMENT TO THE CENTRAL SERVICING AGENT
BY OVERNIGHT MAIL ONLY.

                                      -1-
<PAGE>
This  Agreement  is made by the parties  hereto in  reference  to the  following
facts:

        Whereas the Borrower has obtained  financial  assistance from the CDC in
        the form of a Loan. or a Lease, of real and/or personal property; and

        Whereas the CDC has issued a Debenture, as described above, to fund said
        financial assistance which financial assistance is secured by Borrower's
        Note and related  collateral in the case of a Loan or Lease Agreement in
        the case of a Lease; and

        Whereas the Small  Business  Administration  ("SBA") has  guaranteed the
        Debenture pursuant to 15 U.S.C. Section 697; and

        Whereas  the CDC has  assigned  the Note and related  collateral  or the
        Lease, as the case may be to SBA as security for SBA's guarantee; and

        Whereas SBA, in consideration of its guarantee, has required the parties
        hereto  appoint  a  Central  Servicing  Agent  ("CSA")  to  receive  and
        distribute  funds  flowing  among the parties  hereto and perform  other
        services as specified herein and in the MSAA; and

        Whereas  the  Debenture  has  been  pooled  with  like  Debentures.  and
        Certificates  have  been  issued  representing  ownership  of  all  or a
        fractional part of such pool to investors who have purchased interest in
        the pool; and

        Whereas  SBA has  appointed  a  Trustee  to  issue  Certificates  to the
        Investors, receive f unds from the CSA and remit funds to the Investors.

NOW, THEREFORE. IT IS AGREED BY THE PARTIES AS FOLLOWS:

     1.   APPOINTMENT OF SERVICING AGENT

          a.   The CDC hereby appoints Colson Services Corp. as its agent to:

               (1)  Receive the  proceeds of the sale of the  Debenture,  net of
                    selling  expenses,  from the Selling Group as defined herein
                    below and,  after  distributing  any of the  proceeds in the
                    manner set forth herein, to disburse the remaining  proceeds
                    to the Borrower specified herein.

               (2)  Receive  monthly Loan or Lease  payments  from the Borrower.
                    credit  some within one  business  day of receipt and retain
                    said payments in an account established pursuant to the MSAA
                    called  the  Maste'r   Reserve   Account   ("MRA")  until  a
                    semi-annual Debenture payment is due.

               (3)  Remit  semi-annual  Debenture  payments  to the  Trustee  as
                    required by the MSAA.

          b.   The Borrower  hereby  consents to appointment of Colson  Services
               Corp. as CSA and in addition agrees to:

               (1)  Remit its monthly Loan or Lease  payments when due to CSA by
                    Automatic  Clearing House or Federal Fund wire transfer,  or
                    in a manner approved by CSA in writing.

               (2)  Pay all fees attributable to Borrower as described herein.

                                      -2-
<PAGE>
DEBENTURE AND BORROWER'S OBLIGATIONS

Date of SBA approval  July 29, 1996

                                (a) DEBENTURE            (b) NOTE (OR LEASE)

a. * Principal Amount:            $998,000.00                $998,000.00

b.   Issue or Note/Lease Date:    April 16, 1997             February 12, 1997

c.   Interest Rate:                        %                          %**

d.   Maturity Date:               April 1, 2017              April 1, 2017

e.   Payment:                     $                          $
                                  (Semi-Annual)              (Monthly P & I)
f.   Payment Dates:
              Every 1st of        April                      May 1, 1997
                                                       (First of month starting)
              and 1st of          October

g.     Net Debenture Proceeds:                      $ 971,000.00
       (as defined in 13 CFR 108.2)

The Borrower hereby certifies that the CDC has extended financial  assistance to
the Borrower in the form of a Loan or a Lease evidenced by a written  instrument
(the "Note" or the "Lease"),  a copy of which is attached hereto,  and described
in Column (b) above.

The CDC hereby certifies that it has issued a Debenture  described in Column (a)
above.  The CDC  acknowledges  that it is solely  responsible for collecting all
Loan or Lease  payments,  including  delinquent  payments  if any,  due from the
Borrower so that funds shall be available  for making all required  payments due
pursuant to the terms of the  Debenture.  The CDC agrees to remit any delinquent
payments collected by the CDC from the Borrower to the CSA.

*    Item in Column (a) must be identical to item in Column (b)

**   The Note Rate is the interest  rate charged on the  Debenture.  adjusted to
     ref iect monthly amortization.  Servicing fees, as per Section 8. are added
     to monthly  principal and interest  payments to arrive at Borrower's  total
     monthly  obligations.  As set f  orth  in the  Loan  Amortization  Schedule
     attached  to the Note.  this  combined  amount is -the  amount that must be
     remitted to the CSA each month.

3.   UNDERWRITERS FEE

     The  offering  of  the  Certificates  to  investors  through  one  or  more
     Underwriters  has been arranged.  The  Underwriters fee for this service is
     five-eighths of one percent (5/8 of I %) of the total  Debenture  proceeds.
     identified in Section 5.b. hereof.

4.   INITIATION. PROCESSING AND CLOSING FEES

     The CDC and Borrower  agree to pay the fees and closing  costs set forth in
     the Disbursement instructions, identified in Section 5.a.(3.) hereof.

                                      -3-
<PAGE>
5.   DISBURSEMENT  INSTRUCTIONS  (All information must be completed "N/A" if not
     applicable) (NOTE: Please round to the nearest penny.)

     The total Debenture proceeds shall be disbursed as follows:

     a.   The CSA will disburse the following:

          (1)  Amount of the Net  Debenture  Proceeds to be  disbursed
               (less  amount  in (2),  if  applicable)  to  Borrower's
               Creditor(s) by wire-transfer, as their interests appear
               below:                                               $ 971,000.00

          (a)  RECIPIENT BANK (e.g., Interim Lender) (NET DEBENTURE PROCEEDS):

         NAME OF RECIPIENT BANK                        CITY AND STATE
                                                       9920 So. La Cieniga Blvd,
         Imperial Bank                                 Inglewood, CA 90301

         ACCOUNT NAME                                  ACCOUNT NUMBER
         Santa Clara Land Title Company                16-147-230

         ROUTING SYMBOL & TRANSACTION CODE             ATTENTION OF:
           (MUST BE 9 DIGITS)                          Liz Zankich
         122-201-444                                   Esc. # SP116109

          (b)  CORRESPONDENT  BANK - COMPLETE  THE  FOLLOWING  ONLY IF RECIPIENT
               BANK IS NOT A FEDWIRE MEMBER:

          CORRESPONDENT BANK NAME                                 CITY AND STATE

          ACCOUNT NAME                                            ACCOUNT NUMBER

          ROUTING SYMBOL & TRANSACTION CODE (MUST BE 9 DIGITS)    ATTENTION OF:

          (2)  Amount of Net Debenture  Proceeds held in escrow by CSA
               pursuant to Regulations Section 108.503-7(c):                   0

          (3)  Processing Fees. Deposits, and Other CJosing Costs:

               (a)  Reserve   Amount   (0.005   times  Net   Debenture
                    Proceeds)  to  be  deposited  in  Master   Reserve
                    Account                                             4,855.00

               (b)  Funding Fee (0.0025 times Net Debenture  Proceeds)
                                                                        2,427.50

               (c)  CDC  Processing  Fee (0.015)  times Net  Debenture
                    Proceeds)                                          14,565.00

               (d)  Closing Costs                                              0

                    SUM of (a) through (d):                            21,847.50

          (4)  Balance. if any. to the Borrower in amount of:             162.50

          (5)  Amount  received and disbursed by CSA (Sum of Items (1)
               thru (4)):                                             993,010.00

     b.   The  Underwriters  fee is  withheld  prior to CSA Receipt of
          funds.  (Underwriters Fee calculated as follows: Sum of (1).
          (2) & (3) from above  divided by 0.99375;  round this number
          up to the  next  highes-t  thousand;  multiply  this  number
          by.00625):                                                    4,990.00

     c.   TOTAL  DEBENTURE  AMOUNT  (sum of Items  a.  (5)  plus  b.):
                                                                      998,000.00

                                 -4-
<PAGE>
Under the attached Note Lease,  the Borrower is subject to a late payment charge
which the CSA shall remit to either the.  CSA or SEA at the  direction of SBA as
compensation for additional collection efforts.

7.   PREPAYMENT

     It is understood  that the Note or Lease is subject to  prepayment,  at the
     option of the Borrower,  upon  notification  of CSA by SEA and based on the
     prepayment price computed as set forth in the Borrower's Note or Lease. The
     Borrower  agrees to give 45 days written  notice to the CDC if it elects to
     prepay such Note or Lease. in accordance with the -Prepayment' provision of
     the attached  Note or Lease.  Any such  prepayment  will be remitted an the
     scheduled  prepayment date by CSA to the MRA as directed in writing by SEA.
     It is further  understood that prepayments in an amount less than necessary
     to fully  prepay the Note or Lease or made later  than the  scheduled  date
     shall not be permitted.

8.   SERVICING FEES

     As stated in Section 2 above,  in addition to the  principal  and  interest
     payment, the Borrower's obligation includes the following servicing fees:

     a.   The Borrower's total monthly  obligation shall include a servicing fee
          of one-tenth of one percent  (1/10 of I %) per annum on the balance of
          the Note or Lease. such balance to be determined at S-year anniversary
          intervals  at the  beginning  of such  interval.  This  fee  shall  be
          deposited  by the CSA in a  subaccount  of the MRA  called the MRA fee
          subaccount.

     b.   The Borrower's total monthly  obligation shall include a servicing fee
          paid to the CDC of  one-half of one  percent(1/2  of 1 %) per annum of
          the  outstanding  balance  of the Note or Lease  determined  at 5-year
          anniversary intervals at the beginning of such interval.

9.   COMPLETION OF DOCUMENTS

     The Undersigned hereby authorize SEA or its agent,  and/or the CSA, to date
     and otherwise complete any terms of the Debenture. documents evidencing the
     Borrower's  obligation,  and/or this Servicing Agent  Agreement.  which are
     unknown at the time of execution  thereof as soon  thereafter as such terms
     become known.

10.  COMPENSATION TO CSA

     CSA shall be  compensated  for performing the services set forth in Section
     1.a.  of this  Agreement  from the MRA fee  subaccount  at a price for such
     services agreed to with SEA.

11.  INDEMNIFICATION

     The CSA and CDC shall  indemnify and hold each other  harmless from any and
     all suits,  liabilities,  and claims, losses. costs and expenses (including
     reasonable  attorney's  fees) incurred by either as a result of the other's
     negligence  or bad faith or  failure to  perform  in  accordance  with this
     Agreement or with instructions  which either party may receive from time to
     time.

12   TAXPAYER IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

     A borrower is required by law to provide the Central Servicing Agent (CSA),
     Colson Services Corp.. with its correct taxpayer  identification number. If
     the  borrower  does not  provide  the CSA with its  correct  identification
     number.  the borrower may be subject to civil or criminal penalties imposed
     by law.  Under  penalties  of  perjury,  the  borrower  certifies  that the
     taxpayer  identification  number  shown on Page 1 of this  Servicing  Agent
     Agreement is correct.

                                      -5-
<PAGE>
IN WITNESS  WHEREOF,  the parties have  executed  this  Agreement or caused this
Agreement to be executed by their respective  officers thereunto duly authorized
as of the 12th day of February 1997.

The Mortgage Capital                        PACIFIC MAGTRON, INC., a California
Development Corporation                       corporation
(Certified Development Company Name)       (Borrower's Name(s))

BY: /s/ Mary Retzinger                      /s/ Theodore S. Li
   Mary Retzinger, Vice President           Theodore S. Li, President

Attest: /s/ Carole Hines
Carole Hines
Assistant Secretary



                                   Small Business Concern (if not the Borrower):


ACCEPTANCE BY CSA

Colson Services Corp.. as Central Servicing Agent. hereby accepts appointment as
the CSA in accordance with provisions of the foregoing  Agreement at its offices
in New York, New York on this 16th day of April, 1997.

Colson Services Corp.

By:

                                      -6-
<PAGE>
                                                                 SBA LOAN NUMBER
                                                            CDC 942 585 30 03 CA

                        ADDENDUM TO SBA FORM 1506, PAGE 5

8c.      The borrower's  total monthly  obligation shall include a servicing fee
         paid to SBA of one-eighth of one percent (1 /8 of 1 %) per annum on the
         outstanding   balance  of  the  Note  or  Lease  determined  at  5-year
         anniversary intervals at the beginning of such interval.

Dated: February 12, 1997
                                    CDC Name

                                    THE MORTGAGE CAPITAL DEVELOPMENT CORPORATION

Attest: /s/ Carole Hines                       By: /s/ Mary Retzinger
       Carole Hines, Assistant Secretary          Mary Retzinger, Vice President



                           Borrower/Operating Company

PACIFIC MAGTRON, INC., a California corporation

By: /s/ Theodore S. Li
Theodore S. Li, President


                                  Page 7 of 7

                           MUTUAL CONFIDENTIALITY AND
                            NON-DISCLOSURE AGREEMENT

         This Agreement is made and entered into on the 10th day of September,
1997.

BETWEEN:
(1)  Creative Labs, Inc. having the principal offices at 1901 McCarthy
     Boulevard, Milpitas, CA 95085 ("Creative").

(2)  Pacific Magtron, Inc. a California corporation having its principal offices
     at 1800 California Circle, Milpitas, CA 95085 (" ")

WHEREAS:

1.   Creative and Pacific Magtron are engaged in discussions with respect to a
     possible business or financial arrangement or venture between them relating
     to multimedia technology.

2.   In connection therewith disclosure of certain information which is
     proprietary/confidential to the parties may become necessary or desirable.

3.   Each party is willing to disclose such Proprietary/Confidential Information
     to the other parties upon the terms and conditions herein set forth and
     each party is willing to maintain the confidentiality of such information
     disclosed to it by the other parties in accordance with the terms and
     conditions hereof.

NOW THEREFORE, in consideration of the disclosure of such
Proprietary/Confidential Information and the mutual covenants and promises
herein contained, it is agreed as follows:

1.   INTERPRETATION
     For the purposes of this Agreement, "Proprietary/Confidential Information"
     shall mean any and all proprietary, secret information, technical data or
     know-how related to any aspect of other party's business or technology
     including, without limitation, data, know- how, formulas, designs,
     photographs, drawings, specification, software programs and samples and any
     other material bearing or incorporating any such information which is
     disclosed by one party to the other, which information, data or know-how is
     marked or stipulated as being "Proprietary", "Confidential", "Strictly
     Private" or otherwise, using words of similar significance. Such disclosure
     may be made either directly or indirectly, in writing, orally or by
     drawings, plans or inspection of products, materials, parts or equipment.

2.   UNDERTAKING OF THE PARTIES
     Each party hereby undertakes to treat and maintain all
     Proprietary/Confidential Information received from any of the other parties
     in confidence. With respect thereto, each party hereby undertakes and
     agrees as follows:


<PAGE>
     i.   For a period of 5 years from the date of this Agreement, the receiving
          party shall not publish, disseminate nor disclose any
          Proprietary/Confidential Information received from any of the other
          parties to any third party accept to those of its own employment
          having valid need to know the information in the course of employment
          and such disclosure shall be on terms not less restrictive than those
          herein contained.

     ii.  The receiving party shall use the same degree of care to avoid
          disclosure or use of the Proprietary/Confidential Information as it
          uses in respect of its own information of like importance but in no
          case less than a reasonable degree of care.

     iii. The receiving party shall in accordance with the request of the other
          parties, either return all copies, recording and tangible
          manifestations of Proprietary/Confidential Information or destroy the
          same following a determination by any of the parties not to enter into
          any arrangement or venture with each other of the kind contemplated
          herein or upon termination of any related memorandum of understanding
          or agreement entered into between the parties or upon the written
          request of the disclosing party.

3. EXCEPTIONS

          The aforesaid restrictions on the parties shall not apply to any
          Proprietary/Confidential Information which

     i.   Can be proved by documentary evidence to be such
          Proprietary/Confidential Information that was already in the
          possession of the receiving party and at its free disposal before the
          disclosure hereunder to it;

     ii.  Is received by the receiving party from third parties without
          accompanying secrecy or confidentiality obligations and not in
          violation of any duty of confidence under this agreement;

     iii. Is independently developed by the receiving party;

     iv.  Is or becomes generally available to the public in printed
          publications in general discussion through no act or default on the
          part of the receiving party or its agents or employees;

     v.   Is furnished to a third party by a party hereunto who owns such
          Proprietary/Confidential Information without similar restriction on
          the third party's rights;

     vi.  Is approved for release by written authorization of the other party;
          or vii. Is disclosed pursuant to any requirement or request by
          operation of law provided that the involving party shall prior to
          disclosure notify the disclosing party of any such requirement or
          request.

4.   OWNERSHIP

     All Proprietary/Confidential Information disclosed pursuant to this
     Agreement shall be and remain the property of the disclosing party. Nothing
     in this Agreement shall be construed as granting or confirming any rights
     by license or otherwise expressly impliedly or otherwise, for any of the
     Proprietary/Confidential Information disclosed by the disclosing party
     hereunder. All Proprietary/Confidential Information, existing in written
     form or recorded in any other tangible medium, shall be returned to the
     disclosing party upon its request, together with any reproductions or
     copies thereof. Further, upon the disclosing party's request, notes,
     memoranda and reports which incorporate the Proprietary/Confidential
     Information shall, without exception, be destroyed.

5.   ORAL DISCLOSURE

     In the event the disclosing party of such Proprietary/Confidential
     Information orally discloses the information to the receiving party, the
     disclosing party agrees to promptly notify the receiving party of the
     confidentiality of such oral disclosure and reduces to writing such
     Proprietary/Confidential Information and submit the same to the receiving
     party within 15 days of such oral disclosure, upon which the receiving
     party shall not be bound by the confidentiality obligations as herein
     provided as regards the said Proprietary/Confidential Information disclosed
     orally.

6.   AUTHORIZATION

     Each party agrees that necessary authorizations, permits or licenses
     including expert licenses as may be required will be obtained prior to the
     exportation/disclosure of any Proprietary/Confidential Information relating
     to the technology of the other party. The disclosing party shall notify the
     receiving party of the need to obtain any required authorizations, permits
     and licenses and/or the need to comply with any relevant laws or
     regulations relating to the disclosure. The disclosing party shall obtain
     the required authorizations, permits and licenses.

7.   SURVIVAL

     The aforesaid obligations of the receiving party shall survive the
     termination of this Agreement.

8.   LIMITED WARRANTY

     Each party hereto warrants that it has the right to disclose the
     Proprietary/Confidential Information which it discloses to the other
     parties and that the Proprietary/Confidential Information disclosed is to
     the best of its knowledge, correct. Nothing contained in this agreement
     shall be construed to obligate any party to disclose any information to the
     other parties.

9.   REMEDY FOR BREACH

     It is understood and agreed between the parties that any breach of the
     obligations of confidentiality contained in this Agreement may cause the
     disclosing party irreparable loss. Accordingly, and in addition to any
     other remedies a party may have in law or equity, the disclosing party
     shall be entitled to obtain injunctive relief against the receiving party
     to prevent any further or continuing breach of the receiving party's
     obligations or additional damage to the disclosing party in the event such
     loss is in fact incurred by the disclosing party as a result of the breach
     or is imminent.

10.  SEVERABILITY

     If, for any reason, a court of competent jurisdiction finds any provision
     of this Agreement, or any portion thereof, to be unenforceable, such
     decision shall not affect the validity of the remaining portion, which
     remaining portion shall continue in full force and effect as if this
     Agreement had been executed with the invalid portion thereof eliminated
     therefrom.

     In the event that a portion of this Agreement shall be declared to be
     invalid, then the parties agree, that they shall, in good faith, negotiate
     with one another to replace such invalid provision with a valid provision
     as similar as possible to that which had been said to be invalid.

11.  TERMINATION

     This Agreement shall govern all matters referred to herein until terminated
     by either party upon thirty days written notice to the other or in
     accordance with this Agreement. Upon termination, all information and
     materials shall be returned to the respective parties. Notwithstanding the
     termination, each party shall continue to fulfill its obligations hereunder
     for a period of five (5) years thereafter.

12.  MISCELLANEOUS

     Any notice or communication to be given under this Agreement shall be given
     if delivered in writing to the intended recipient at the address and marked
     for the attention of the person set out in this Agreement or as may be
     notified from time to time by the party concerned.

     This Agreement shall be fully binding upon inure to the benefit of and be
     enforceable by the parties herein, their legal representatives and other
     respective successors and assigns. Each party shall not make any assignment
     of the Agreement or any interest therein without the prior written consent
     of the other party.

     The failure of any party to insist upon or enforce strict performance of
     any of the provisions of this Agreement or to exercise any rights or
     remedies under the Agreement shall not be construed as a waiver or
     relinquishment to any extent of such party's rights to assert or rely upon
     any such provisions, rights or remedies in that or any other instance;
     rather the same shall remain in full force and affect.

     The terms of this Agreement are confidential and shall not be disclosed to
     third parties without the written consent of all parties, accept to the
     extent required by a court or regulatory agency of competent jurisdiction.

13.  GOVERNING LAW

     This Agreement shall be governed by, construed and enforced in accordance
     with California Law.

     IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have hereunto set their hands the day and
year first written above.


CREATIVE LABS, INC                          PACIFIC MAGTRON, INC.

Signature: /s/ Joseph R. Bowsky             Signature: /s/ Ted Li
          --------------------------                  --------------------------

Name: Joseph R. Bowsky                      Name: Ted Li
     -------------------------------             -------------------------------

Designation: National Sales Manager         Designation: President
            ------------------------                    ------------------------
             OEM Division

                             EXHIBIT 21.1

                             SUBSIDIARIES



           SUBSIDIARY                           STATE OF INCORPORATION
           ----------                           ----------------------

       Pacific Magtron, Inc.                           California

<TABLE> <S> <C>

<ARTICLE> 5
<LEGEND>
THIS  SCHEDULE  CONTAINS  SUMMARY  FINANCIAL   INFORMATION  EXTRACTED  FROM  THE
CONSOLIDATED  FINANCIAL  STATEMENTS  FOR THE YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31, 1997 AND IS
QUALIFIED IN ITS ENTIRETY BY REFERENCE TO SUCH FINANCIAL STATEMENTS.
</LEGEND>
<CURRENCY> U.S DOLLARS
       
<S>                             <C>
<PERIOD-TYPE>                   YEAR
<FISCAL-YEAR-END>                          DEC-31-1997
<PERIOD-START>                             JAN-01-1997
<PERIOD-END>                               DEC-31-1997
<EXCHANGE-RATE>                                      1
<CASH>                                       3,262,900
<SECURITIES>                                         0
<RECEIVABLES>                                5,140,900
<ALLOWANCES>                                   113,100
<INVENTORY>                                  2,066,800
<CURRENT-ASSETS>                            10,681,800
<PP&E>                                       4,114,800
<DEPRECIATION>                                 209,800
<TOTAL-ASSETS>                              15,057,800
<CURRENT-LIABILITIES>                        5,119,900
<BONDS>                                              0
                                0
                                          0
<COMMON>                                        10,000
<OTHER-SE>                                   6,468,500
<TOTAL-LIABILITY-AND-EQUITY>                15,057,800
<SALES>                                     96,388,500
<TOTAL-REVENUES>                            96,388,500
<CGS>                                       90,364,700
<TOTAL-COSTS>                               90,364,700
<OTHER-EXPENSES>                                78,200
<LOSS-PROVISION>                                     0
<INTEREST-EXPENSE>                             238,600
<INCOME-PRETAX>                              2,086,000
<INCOME-TAX>                                   847,100
<INCOME-CONTINUING>                          1,238,900
<DISCONTINUED>                                       0
<EXTRAORDINARY>                                      0
<CHANGES>                                            0
<NET-INCOME>                                 1,238,900
<EPS-PRIMARY>                                      .12
<EPS-DILUTED>                                      .12
        

</TABLE>


© 2022 IncJournal is not affiliated with or endorsed by the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission